JP7083928B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game.

In the conventional pachinko gaming machine, the total number of prize balls (game value) paid out by winning a game ball in the winning opening can be totaled, and the total number of prize balls (total game value) can be displayed. (For example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-11462

However, in Patent Document 1, when the total number of prize balls exceeds the upper limit value (predetermined size) that can be totaled, the display of the total number of prize balls does not change, so that the interest cannot be improved. There is a problem.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest when the aggregated gaming value reaches a predetermined size.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the gaming machine according to the means 1 is
It is a gaming machine that can play games,
A game value-giving means that can add a game value of a size corresponding to the specific event that has occurred based on the occurrence of the specific event.
A game value aggregation means that can aggregate the given game value,
It is possible to display a value display that can specify the aggregated total game value, and the value display is set to operate in a predetermined manner based on the occurrence of the specific event, and the game value given by the occurrence of the specific event is A value display means that can update the aggregated new aggregated game value to a identifiable value display,
Equipped with
The value display means is
After the total game value reaches the upper limit, the value is displayed in the upper limit arrival display mode.
When the specific event occurs while the value is displayed in the upper limit value arrival display mode, the value display in the upper limit value arrival display mode is performed by the number of digits of the game value given by the specific event. Then, the value is displayed again in the upper limit arrival display mode (display mode shown in FIG. 10-21).
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest when the total game value reaches a predetermined size.

The gaming machine of the means 2 is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
The game value totaling means has the first total game value (for example, the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter) and the second total game value whose total period is shorter than the first total game value as the total game value. (For example, the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter) can be distinguished and aggregated.
The aggregated game value display means can display the first aggregated game value and the second aggregated game value separately (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-20, the first prize ball in the image display device 5). The part where the value 141SG005A of the number counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter are displayed individually)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to distinguish between the first aggregated game value and the second aggregated game value having different aggregation periods.

The gaming machine of the means 3 is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or the means 2.
It is provided with an effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the prize ball number notification effect execution process shown in FIG. 10-22) capable of executing a special effect (for example, a prize ball number notification effect).
The effect executing means executes the special effect based on the fact that the first aggregate game value reaches a specific size regardless of whether or not the second aggregate game value reaches a predetermined size. It is possible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-27 (E) and 10-27 (F), regardless of whether or not the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter has reached the upper limit that can be aggregated. , The part that executes the prize ball number notification effect based on the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball number counter reaching the notification start threshold value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the special effect corresponding to the first aggregated game value having a long aggregation period can be executed even after the second aggregated game value having a short aggregation period reaches a predetermined size.

The gaming machine of the means 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 3.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
A variable device (for example, a variable winning ball device 141SG006B or a special variable winning ball) provided on a special route (for example, the right gaming area 141SG002R) and capable of changing to an enterable state in which the game medium can enter is available. Device 141SG007) and
Of the routes on which the game medium can move, a predetermined route (for example, the left game area 141SG002L) different from the special route and the game medium can enter the predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 141SG010A or the general winning opening 141SG010B, No. 1 Further provided with a region forming member forming (1 start winning opening),
The variable device is controlled to be accessible in a special state advantageous to the player (for example, a high base state or a big hit game state) more frequently than in a non-special state.
The game value-giving means can add game value as the occurrence of the specific event at the time when the game medium enters the predetermined area and when the game medium enters the variable device (for example). , The part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing shown in FIG. 10-7 and pays out the prize balls according to the winning openings of the game balls).
The game value totaling means can total the game value corresponding to the period controlled by the special state, and does not total the game value given by the game value adding means by entering the predetermined area (the game value totaling means). For example, as shown in the modified example 141SG-1, the prize ball when the game ball wins in the prize opening (second start winning opening, large winning opening, general winning opening 141SG010C) provided in the right game area 141SG002R. On the other hand, the prize balls provided in the left game area 141SG002L (general prize opening 141SG010A, general prize opening 141SG010B, first start winning opening) are not counted.
It is characterized by that.
This feature allows for proper aggregation.

The gaming machine of the means 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 4.
The predetermined operation display is executed in the area of the display area of the aggregated game value that is updated by the addition of the game value by the game value giving means, and is not executed in other areas (for example, FIG. 10-20). As shown in, the part where the first addition effect and the second addition effect are executed for different digits depending on the presence or absence of carry)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to easily grasp the correspondence relationship between the given game value and the aggregated game value.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a staging control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a staging control process process. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation pattern and the type of reach. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the advance notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the decision ratio in the advance notice production decision processing. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating the staging control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each big hit. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), (C). Is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for loss. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value confirmation processing. (A) is a flowchart showing RAM clear processing, and (B) is a schematic diagram of RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows a part of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off detection process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a staging control main process. Explanatory drawing which shows the information stored in RAM and the state which is cleared. It is explanatory drawing which shows the initial design for each received command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notification mode at the time of activation of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off detection process. It is a flowchart which shows a part of the staging control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process in the modification. It is a flowchart which shows a part of the effect control main processing in the modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in the modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in the modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in the modification. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a figure exemplifying the staging control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is explanatory drawing of the determination example of the fluctuation pattern in a special zone. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a part example of a staging control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prize ball display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prize ball display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prize ball display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prize ball display processing. It is explanatory drawing of the 1st prize ball number counter and the 2nd prize ball number counter. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the prize notification effect execution processing. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in the addition effect and the prize notification effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in the addition effect and the prize notification effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the prize ball number notification effect execution processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special zone end notification effect execution processing. It is a timing chart of the fluctuation display in the special zone. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in a big hit game and in a special zone. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in a special zone and a non-special zone. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in the modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in the modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in the modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in the special zone in the modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in the special zone in the modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in the modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in the modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in the modification.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that the fluctuation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinking and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as variable display or variable.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of hold storages. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening in which a game ball is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect lamp 9 for gaming effects is provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area by the hitting ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be grasped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation for the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player to the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal map game (when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per ordinary figure", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (starting prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit" and the jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A big hit type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit gaming state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained and a big hit type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the opening mode similar to the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened from the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probabilistic state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability change control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the “big hit” is likely to occur, which is a more advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the probabilistic change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, and a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time reduction control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time reduction control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in a time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in a probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in a normal state. The high-accuracy state and the low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, it is not necessary that there is no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like / extinguishing, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is an aspect that is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the effect mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. The reach production includes, for example, a normal reach and a super reach having a higher hit reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are all stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of "probability change jackpot" which is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and the probability change state is changed after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a definite decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a big hit combination. The confirmed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (holding display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit middle effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type of the big hit game state having the same aspect as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high probability state and the low probability state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is a progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 has, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transfers a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) gives a staging control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including the jackpot type)), and fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The staging control board 12 is equipped with a staging control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing an effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing a program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and is an effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the voice designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. Consists of including the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the staging control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the gaming control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes a stack pointer setting, a register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), a parallel input / output port, etc.), a setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). Upon receiving the effect control command, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying, for example, that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized in the image display device 5.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a process of protecting the data of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is being changed, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). Along with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to enter the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined error processing on the main side, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (details are provided). See below).

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the normal figure hold display 25C is turned on to display the number of normal figure hold.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, the look-ahead judgment, etc. is made to the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various decisions based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the decision value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the staging control board 12. In the staging control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the pre-determination result of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the process of determining. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol variation processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time reduction state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds to be executed with the big winning opening open has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a big hit game state when the maximum number of executions has been reached. It includes the process of making settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this big hit end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, and a probable change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state. It includes processing to make various settings for starting control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and the measured elapsed time. It includes a process to determine whether or not it is. When the large winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the staging control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the staging control board 12 will be described. In the staging control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the staging control CPU 120 is activated to execute the staging control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the staging control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are made. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various staging devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the staging control process process in step S76, the staging random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the staging random numbers used on the side of the staging control board 12 is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, the mode thereof, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illuminated signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time for the command has elapsed without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the small hit end effect in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the small hit game state. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The big hit middle effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to 7 ”and end the big hit production process.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly by using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to execute a game by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature section 31AK)
Next, the feature portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-1 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern and the type of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8-1 (A), in the present embodiment, the non-reach loss variation patterns PA1-1 and PA1 in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is not the reach mode and the display result is “loss”. -2, the variation pattern of reach loss where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode and the display result is "loss" PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., the display result is "big hit". , PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and the like are prepared.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect suggesting that the jackpot state is controlled. The reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is represented by the number of black stars in FIG. 8-1 (B). Normal reach <Super reach E <Super reach D <Super reach C <Super The order is higher in the order of reach B <super reach A. In addition, a reach that is determined to be a big hit may be provided.

In this embodiment, the super reach is performed via the normal reach. In addition, during the reach production of Super Reach, a development production that develops (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. The fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the like shown in FIG. 8-1 (A) and the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like are fluctuation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. In addition, although FIG. 8-1 (A) shows a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability develops to a super reach one step higher, a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability develops by two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

In this embodiment, except for the normal reach having the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, Super Reach E, which has the lowest reliability among Super Reach, is notified of the title of the reach only by display, and other Super Reach is notified of the title by display and voice. In this way, the title is notified by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than in the reach with low reliability. As a result, the expectation of the player can be effectively fueled, and the staging effect is improved. The mode of notifying the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or regardless of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be different depending on the actual display result and the like. In addition, the font (Gothic typeface, Mincho typeface, etc.) and typeface (line book, regular script, etc.) of the title character may be different depending on the type of reach.

The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the one indicating the title itself such as the name of the reach, and may indicate the name of the character appearing in the reach production, the production content of the reach production, and the like.

(Example of staging operation of feature unit 31AK)
Subsequently, an example of the staging operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following staging operation is executed by the staging control CPU 120 executing the staging control process process based on the staging control command transmitted from the main board 11. 8-2 and 8-3 are diagrams showing an example of the super reach effect operation according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8-2 (A) shows that variable display of decorative symbols is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5. ing. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (B), the decorative symbols showing the numbers 7 on the “left” and “right” are stopped to enter the reach mode. After that, the production branches according to the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (C), the character 31AK001, which is a ally character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. After a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction portion of the super reach effect (also referred to as the super reach effect), the image display device 5 has the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-2 (D). The title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the character "SP Reach A") is displayed on the entire screen, and the sound corresponding to the title name of Reach (here, "Super Reach A") is output from the speaker 8. As a result, the title of Super Reach A is notified. After that, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is erased, and as shown in FIG. 8-2 (E), the character 31AK003 which is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 are displayed. The subsequent part of the reach production of Super Reach A, which is confronted by, is executed. The production in which the characters confront each other is also called a battle production. In the battle production, if the ally character wins, it becomes a big hit, and if the ally character loses, it becomes a loss.

When displaying the dialogue on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the voice corresponding to the dialogue may be output from the speaker 8. Further, the dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 8-2 (E), and may be displayed in subtitles at the lower part of the image display device 5.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of super reach B, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (C), the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction part of the super reach effect, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-2 (F). (Here, the character "SP reach B") is displayed, and the voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, "Super reach B") is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of Super Reach B is changed. Be notified. After that, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, and as shown in FIG. 8-2 (G), the character 31AK006 which is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the characters 31AK001 and the character 31AK006 are displayed. The subsequent part of the reach production of Super Reach B, which is confronted by, is executed.

As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title of the reach is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the super reach effect. By doing so, the title can be notified after the introduction portion of the super reach effect is shown to the player, so that the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

In addition, Super Reach A (Fig. 8-2 (C) → (D) → (E) ...) and Super Reach B (Fig. 8-2 (C) → (F) → (G) ...) Then, in the introduction part until the title is notified, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 8-2 (C)). By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which super reach will be achieved after the super reach production is started and which title will be notified. Super Reach A and Super Reach B are not limited to completely sharing the production mode until the title is announced, and it is possible to determine which Super Reach will be achieved by paying close attention to the production. The parts may be made into a common production mode. For example, in the introduction part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect of displaying an enemy character or suggesting an enemy character) is executed in a manner related to the title notified thereafter. You may do it. By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the effect. In this way, the title notification may be executed after making it possible to specify which super reach will be achieved.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of super reach D, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the title 31AK007 of super reach D (here, the character “SP reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, the speaker 8 outputs a voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, "defeat the enemy"), so that the title of the super reach D is notified. In this way, in Super Reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach production. Further, under the title 31AK007, an expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 that suggests the expectation degree of the reach is displayed. Expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H). Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation that is a big hit, but it does not have to completely match the reliability of the big hit of reach.

It should be noted that the voice notification of Super Reach D does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the content of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice is different depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification mode of the title notification becomes various and the interest is improved.

After the title is notified in Super Reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-2 (I). At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be reduced and displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of reach even during the reach production. Note that FIG. 8-2 (I) shows the same production contents as those in FIG. 8-2 (C) (Super Reach A, Super Reach B), but the super reach effect dedicated to Super Reach D is executed. You may.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (J), the character 31AK009, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is displayed. Will be executed.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (A), the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the character "SP Reach E") is displayed in a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. By doing so, the title of Super Reach E is notified. In Super Reach E, the title is not notified by voice. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 which is an enemy character are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach E in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other is displayed. Will be executed. In this way, in Super Reach E, the title is notified along with the progress of the reach production. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during the reach production.

In the reach production of Super Reach E, which has low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an excessive sense of expectation by notifying the title without stopping the progress of the reach production. On the other hand, in the reach production of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach production is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)). , (H)). By doing so, the title notification according to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. Even in the super reach production such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the reach. Further, contrary to this embodiment, in the reach production of the super reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach production of super reach with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach production may be stopped and the title notification may be performed.

(Title notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the Super Reach production is performed. The title is notified at the start. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the super reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach having low jackpot reliability are notified. In E, the title was notified at the start of the super reach production, but in the case of a reach with a high jackpot reliability, the title is notified at the start of the super reach production, and in the case of a reach with a low jackpot reliability, the super is announced. The title may be notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach production.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the image display device 5 is notified. The title is notified in a part of the screen (second area) of. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability, so that effective title notification becomes possible. The title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be one in which the title is displayed in a size that fits in the entire screen, or the title is displayed there with the entire background as the background for title notification. It may be something (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display area for title notification may be different between Super Reach A and Super Reach B, or the display area for title notification may be different between Super Reach D and Super Reach E.

The method of differentiating the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification may be arbitrarily different according to the reach effect. For example, in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of reach with low reliability. Further, when the display area for performing the title notification is different according to the reach effect, the display area may be different or the display place may be different as in this embodiment.

(Expectation suggestion display)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the expectation suggestion display is not displayed, and Super Reach D having lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach A and Super Reach B is not displayed. In the title notification in, the expectation degree suggestion display was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming dull. Further, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation degree suggestion display is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the sense of expectation by displaying the expectation suggestion display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. In addition, the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed in at least a part of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach E.

As shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the expectation degree suggestion display is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars, and the expectation degree may be suggested by a meter or a gauge, or the expectation degree may be suggested. The numerical value corresponding to may be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H) or the like, when the number of black stars is used, half of the black stars may be displayed so that the number of stages of expectation may be increased. ..

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is erased and the super reach effect is executed. As a result, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, attention can be paid to the reach effect. Further, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title is continuously displayed until the determined effect described later is executed. As a result, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the type of reach can be grasped even during the super reach production. Further, by doing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the display end timing of the title may be arbitrarily changed because the effect of the effect can be improved in any case.

Although the effect of the reach effect of the super reach C is omitted here, for example, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decisive production)
After each reach effect is executed, when the timing for deriving the display result (the final stage of the variable display) is reached, a decision effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is executed. The deciding effect includes a deciding effect indicating that the display result is "big hit" and a deciding effect indicating that the display result is "missing". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (B), a determination effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. After that, if the display result is "big hit", the image 31AK013 showing that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-3 (C), and as shown in FIG. 8-3 (D), the image 31AK013 is displayed. A definite decorative pattern that is a jackpot combination is derived. If the display result is "missing", an image showing that the ally character has been defeated is displayed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a reach loss combination is derived.

In this embodiment, even if the title is continuously notified even during the reach production, the notification of the title is terminated before the determined production is executed. As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the deciding effect, and it is possible to execute a sharp title notification.

In the effect operation examples shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, during the reach effect of the super reach, the decorative pattern is reduced in the lower right portion of the image display device 5 to execute variable display. , The method of displaying the decorative pattern during the reach production may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative pattern may not be displayed during the reach effect, or the display mode (size, position, shade, number, etc.) may be different depending on the type of reach effect.

When the image display device 5 displays the hold display, the active display, the character resident during the variable display, and the display related to the mobile interlocking, it is appropriately hidden during the reach effect of the super reach in order to pay attention to the reach effect. May be. At that time, these displays may be left displayed during a low-reliability reach effect such as Super Reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being overly expected by the low-reliability reach production, and it is possible to pay attention to the reach production in the high-reliability reach production.

(Development production)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation when the development effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), when the development effect is executed while the reach effect of Super Reach D is being executed (the title notification of Super Reach D is being executed), FIG. 8-4. As shown in (B), the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn. After that, when developing into Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (C), the title of Super Reach A is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. When developing into Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (D), the title of Super Reach B is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach is executed. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source can be switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach the development has occurred. As shown in FIG. 8-4, when the reach of the development destination is the reach of performing the title notification by display and voice, the title notification by display and voice is executed again.

The development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), and may be an effect in which the screen is gradually cracked and cracked, or a sandstorm (display as if it has failed) is displayed. It may be displayed. By making such an effect, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect. In addition, there may be a development effect of Gase, such as a production in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion production)
In the staging operation example shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the black star indicating the expectation degree was displayed from the beginning on the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008. It is also possible to execute the expectation degree suggestion effect that suggests the expectation degree by becoming a black star.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A), when notifying the title of Super Reach D, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021 of five white stars is first displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (C), the black star 31AK022 is expected to move. The effect of fitting into one of the white stars of the degree suggestion display 31AK021 is executed. At this time, a voice "pin" indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased is output from the speaker 8. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (D) and 8-5 (E), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise each time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation is settled in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (F), the black stars are highlighted as if they shine. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation degree suggestion production has ended.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 8-5 (A) to (F), the black stars are displayed one by one, and the expectation degree indicated by the expectation degree suggestion display is increased by one step, but the black stars are two. Two or more may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be raised by two or more steps. Alternatively, a half black star may be displayed to raise the degree of expectation by half a step. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output depending on the number of displayed stars (the number of steps of the rising expectation). For example, the same sound may be output when a half black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three and a half black stars are displayed. In addition, audio may not be output in some cases. By doing so, the expected degree suggestion effect becomes various and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, regardless of the number of steps of expectation that increases at one time, the same black star image is displayed, it fits in the white star of the expectation suggestion display, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of steps of expectation that increases. You may try to perform such an effect.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command for designating a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, the effect based on the command is executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background, characters, motifs, sounds output from the speaker 8 and the like displayed on the image display device 5 may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of variable displays and the game state, or may be changed by the operation of the player.

8-5 (G) to 8-5 (L) are examples of the effect operation of the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion effect when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect mode. In the normal mode, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion effect are executed as shown in FIGS. 8-5 (A) to (F). In the special mode, the reach effect based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is the reach effect of the super reach D2, which is different from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach D is specified, the title 31AK023 of Super Reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-5 (G). At this time, the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but the sound different from the normal mode (for example, the sound having a different voice color) is output. Further, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024 in Super Reach D2 is not a star shape but a rhombus shape.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (H), a black rhombus 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (I), the black rhombus 31AK025 moves and is expected. The effect of fitting into one of the white rhombuses of the degree suggestion display 31AK024 is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a voice "pon" indicating that the black rhombus indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (J) and 8-5 (K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the expectation is settled in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black rhombuses are highlighted as shown in FIG. 8-5 (L). In this way, depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed) determined according to the player's selection, the game state, etc., the effect of the effect is diversified by changing the notification mode of the title. improves.

FIG. 8-5 shows an example of the effect operation when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is specified, but other reach effects (title notification, expectation degree) depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed). (Including suggestive production) may be made different in the production mode. Depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not to notify the reach title and the execution ratio of the title notification may be different. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing so, it is possible to execute the effect according to the player's preference and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the expectation degree is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation degree suggestion display, and the expectation degree suggestion effect that gradually increases the number of black stars is executed. It is also possible to execute an expectation suggestion effect that gradually reduces the number of indications suggesting. Such an expectation degree suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the expectation degree suggestion effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other examples of development production)
In the case of executing the expectation degree suggestion effect for gradually increasing the display indicating the expectation degree of the expectation degree suggestion display, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation degree. In this case, when the display showing the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), after the title of Super Reach D is notified and the effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is completed, the image is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-6 (B). A development effect in which the button image 31AK031 is displayed on the device 5 is executed. Here, when the operation to the push button 31B is detected, the title 31AK032 of Super Reach C (here, the character "SP Reach C") is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-6 (C). , The title of Super Reach C is notified. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source can be switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach the development has occurred. Further, under the title 31AK032, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is three is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. In addition, after the movable body 32 operates, the development effect in which the title and the expectation degree suggestion display change may be executed.

(Notice production)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed depending on the notification mode of the title (for example, the display color of the title). For example, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), the title 31AK036 of the super reach A is displayed in black, and the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of the super reach A is displayed. Is notified, and as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), the title notice in which the display color of the title 31AK060 changes to red is executed. In this way, if the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and if the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title notice shown in FIG. 8-7, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of display.

Further, when the title notice in which the display mode (display color) of the title changes is executed, the sound may be output according to the display mode after the change in the title display mode. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. Further, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, the sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change.

(Execution timing of title notification)
It is preferable that the notification of the title during reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) that is controlled to the big hit advantageous state and improves the expectation, such as the advance notice effect and the development effect. By doing so, once the title is notified, an effect of improving the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's expectation can be maintained.

FIG. 8-8 is a flowchart showing an example of the advance notice effect determination process for determining whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect mode. The notice effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 of FIG. 7. In the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is the variation pattern of the super reach (step 31AKS001).

In the case of a fluctuation pattern of super reach (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of super reach (whether or not the title notice is executed) is determined (step 31AKS002).

In step 31AKS002, the display color of the title of the super reach is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (A), depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "missing". As shown in Fig. 8-9 (A), the display color of the Super Reach title changes from "black", "red", "black" to "red", and from "black" to "fruit pattern". Those that change, those that change from "red" to "fruit pattern" are provided, and the jackpot reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the change timing of the display color of the title. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In the "fruit pattern", the characters of the title may be displayed in bold and the characters themselves may be the "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the display area of the title may be the "fruit pattern". .. There may be a pattern displayed as a "fruit pattern" from the beginning. For those whose display color changes, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the display color may change after the title notification is executed. For those whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the display period of the title differs depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may differ depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super reach (for example, super reach D or super reach E) in which the title display period is long, a plurality of changing timings may be provided and the change timing may be determined to be one of them. Then, in the case of a super reach with a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or smaller than the number of super reach with a long title display period.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the title is determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (A) in the normal mode, and as shown in FIG. 8-9 (B) in the special mode. The display color of the title is determined at a rate different from that of the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by making the execution mode (display color and change timing of the display color) of the title notice different depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a line notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed depending on the display mode of the character's line (for example, the display color of the line) in the reach effect of the super reach.

After determining the display color of the title of the super reach, the display color of the character's dialogue (whether or not the dialogue notice is executed) in the reach production of the super reach is determined (step 31AKS003).

In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (C), depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "missing". As shown in Fig. 8-9 (C), the display color of the dialogue in the reach production is provided to change from "white", "red", "white" to "red", and this order (ascending order) is provided. ), The reliability of the big hit is high. That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the change timing of the display color of the dialogue. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the effect of the effect is improved. For those whose display color changes, the display color may change after the dialogue is displayed. For those whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the timing at which the display color changes.

In addition, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the title notice and the dialogue notice include the same effect mode (display color), the jackpot reliability may be increased when the same effect mode is used. Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the change timing of the production mode between the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the change timings are the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be different depending on which change comes first. By doing so, it is possible to pay attention to the respective change timings of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the dialogue may be determined in the special mode at a ratio different from that in the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

In addition, instead of the dialogue notice, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability may be executed by changing the effect mode of the reach effect. In that case, in the advance notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided so that the jackpot reliability differs according to the change timing.

After determining the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect, or when it is determined that the pattern is not the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (step AK31S001; No), whether or not to execute the other advance notice effect and the effect mode are determined (step AK31S004). After that, the determination results in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the advance notice effect determination process is terminated.

In this embodiment, the title notice and the dialogue notice can be executed in the case of super reach, but the title notice is given in the case of a specific super reach (for example, other than the unreliable super reach). And at least one of the dialogue notices may be feasible. Further, the title notice and the dialogue notice have been described as being decided by the decision ratio shown in FIG. 8-9, but the decision ratio is arbitrary, and for example, the decision ratio may be different depending on the type of super reach. good. By doing so, it is possible to execute the advance notice effect according to the type of reach, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the number of feasible production modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between the title notice and the dialogue notice. By doing so, the production becomes more diverse and the production effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of feasible staging modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of feasible staging modes may be the same. By doing so, it is possible to execute a unified notice effect, and it becomes easier for the player to grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action production)
When the effect mode of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes, an effect indicating that the effect mode changes may be executed. For example, the action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the action effect that the image acts on at least one of the title and the dialogue may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or dialogue may be changed. The effect mode (action effect image, etc.) of the action effect may be common regardless of whether it acts on the title or the dialogue. In addition, there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or dialogue does not change even though the action effect is executed. When executing the action effect, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination results related to the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be executed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may be different depending on the effect mode of the action effect, or the title notice and the title notice may be different. The ratio of which effect mode changes (the ratio of which action) may be different from the dialogue notice, or the ratio of how many colors (steps) change may be different. .. By executing such an action effect, the player will eventually pay attention to whether the action effect image is displayed, the title or the dialogue, and the effect will be improved. When there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect and the effect mode may be determined at different ratios depending on the effect mode. By doing so, it is possible to execute the action effect according to the effect mode, and the effect effect is improved.

As another example of such an action effect, at least one of the title and the dialogue is produced (display color) according to the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the action content of the character or the effect content in the battle effect). May change. By doing so, the player will pay attention to the production content of the reach production.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above-mentioned feature unit 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all of the feature portions described in the above embodiment are not essential configurations and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub LCD)
As a sub-display device different from the image display device 5, a sub-liquid crystal display may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Although expressed as a sub liquid crystal display here, the sub display device may be composed of an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed to, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, or may be movable or retractable. In the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be executed on the sub liquid crystal. When the title is continuously displayed even after the title is notified as in the super reach D and the super reach E of the above embodiment, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display. In this case, after the title is notified on the image display device 5, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display. By doing so, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display can be displayed without disturbing the super reach effect in the image display device 5, and the title and the expectation degree suggestion display become easy to understand.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestion effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to the title notification (mainly the notification for displaying characters) related to other effects. You may. For example, as a advance notice effect (for example, a look-ahead advance notice effect), when a look-ahead zone effect for shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, etc.) in which the background image and the effect mode are different in the image display device 5 is executed, the shifted zone is executed. The present invention may be applied to the title notification of. When presenting a mission ("Reach with 7", "Use the stick controller to annihilate the enemy", etc.) and perform a mission production that will be in an advantageous state for the player when the mission is completed. The present invention may be applied to the title notification of a mission.

(Variation example 31AK-1 of the feature portion 31AK)
In the above embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a decision effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is executed, and then the display result is shown (). 8-3 (B) to (D)). Instead of such a determination effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect for prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and when the predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the victory or defeat of the battle effect, temporarily stopping the display result, or the like. By doing so, since the display result is shown according to the operation of the player, the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased, and the interest is improved.

8-10 and 8-11 are diagrams showing an example of a super reach effect operation in the modified example 31AK-1 in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), after the reach mode is set in the image display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), the ally character 31AK041 and the enemy character character 31AK041. 31AK042 is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 8-10 (C) to (F) and 8-11 (G) to (I), a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

Along with the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (C), a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. As a result, the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the acceptance of the operation is currently restricted.

In this modification 31AK-1, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that the operation effect is executed are prepared. Then, the jackpot reliability differs depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. In addition, the image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a more reliable mode.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (D), the praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-10 (E), the praying character 31AK045 changes to the happy character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 is displayed. The large button image changes to 31AK047.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-11 (I), the effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the large button image 31AK047 is displayed. The effect 31AK050 that the bullet hits is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

As described above, in this modification 31AK-1, when the operation effect image changes, the action effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. In addition, the operation effect image may change without the action effect. In addition, the operation effect image may not change even though the action effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may differ depending on the type of action effect.

Then, before a predetermined time from which the display result is derived, the control line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. 8-11 (J), and the stick image 31AK051 is in the center portion as shown in FIG. 8-11 (K). Is enlarged and displayed, and a display prompting the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is displayed. Further, at this time, the operation to the stick controller 31A becomes an effective operation valid period.

Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, the image 31AK052 showing that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-11 (L). After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (M), a definite decorative symbol to be a jackpot combination is derived. If the operation is not detected within the predetermined operation valid period, the image shown in FIG. 8-11 (L) is automatically displayed.

In this modification 31AK-1, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as operation effect images, and an operation effect using these images is executed in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image. The reliability of the jackpot when it is done is high. Even if a low-reliability operation effect image is displayed, it may change to a highly reliable operation effect image during the reach effect, so the effect is improved and the player's expectation is raised. Can be maintained.

In the staging operation examples shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11, the reach title notification and the expectation degree suggestion display are omitted, but the reach staging shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11 is omitted. Or may be appropriately executed in parallel with the operation effect. The determination regarding the operation effect and the operation effect image (presence / absence of operation effect, display of operation effect image, presence / absence of action effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8.

(Variation example 31AK-2 of the feature portion 31AK)
A suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state may be performed. For example, the shutter effect of performing the first suggestion display and the reach title effect of performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with a shutter display is executed after the variable display is started. Further, in the reach title effect, an effect of displaying the reach title indicating the development destination of the reach effect is executed after the reach. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, a specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title notice of the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

The specific image is an image with high jackpot reliability that is displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plurality of types of elements include a banana image of element E1, a melon image of element E2, an apple image of element E3, a watermelon image of element E4, and a strawberry image of element E5. A fruit pattern image composed of these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Further, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in each of the shutter display and the reach title display.

When the shutter effect is executed after the start of the variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the reach effect, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include each element E1 to E5 is displayed. An image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image showing the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <blue image <red image <fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a reach title in red characters). Then, depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, any one image pattern may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery.

When the shutter display and the reach title are displayed, even when the fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and the game effect lamp 9 emits a notification. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When performing such shutter display and reach title display, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. Further, in the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. The output period of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

FIG. 8-12 is a display screen view when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 8-12 (a), when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed at the start of the variable display on the image display device 5. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, when the shutter effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed, and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the closed shutter is opened, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started as shown in FIG. 8-12 (b). The downward arrows indicate the variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, the reach state is reached as shown in FIG. 8-12 (c).

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (d), the super reach effect is started. The variable display is displayed small, for example, in the upper right corner of the screen, and the character is displayed on the left side of the screen. The reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the content of the super reach to be executed is shown as the reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, in the reach title image 31AK062, the characters "battle reach" indicating that the reach effect accompanied by the battle effect is executed are displayed.

Further, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed, and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after outputting the common sound, an effect of emitting a specific sound (voice) indicating that the character has high jackpot reliability such as "hot" is executed. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than that in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title production, by outputting a specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Although the case where the output periods of the common sound and the specific sound are completely separated has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

After that, the battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 8-12 (e) is executed. Enemy characters are displayed on the left side of the screen, and ally characters are displayed on the right side of the screen. When the ally character wins the battle with the enemy character, the characters "Battle win!" Are displayed in the upper left of the screen. It is notified that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect is completed, the screen returns to the variable display screen with the original number pattern. As shown in FIG. 8-12 (f), all the symbols are stopped and the jackpot symbol of "777" is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and 8-12 (d), both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 include all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image. By doing so, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. This makes it possible to accurately convey that the fruit pattern image with high jackpot reliability is displayed.

Further, the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12 (a) is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12 (d). Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062.

Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12 (a) and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12 (d) are displayed at different timings. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is a specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping execution timings.

The determination regarding the shutter effect (presence / absence of shutter effect and effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8. In that case, the determination related to the shutter effect may be made based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 of FIG. 8-8. For example, when the display color of the title is determined to be a fruit pattern, the shutter effect of the fruit pattern may be easily executed. Further, the determination related to the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8 together with the decision related to the shutter effect.

(Explanation of Feature Unit 122SG of the Present Embodiment)
Next, the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. The front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment is omitted because it is the same as the feature portion 31AK described above. As shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, the main board 11 in the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment is housed in the board case 122SG201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the state. Further, on the main board 11, the lock switch 122SG051 for switching to a setting change state in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed or a setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed. And, the setting changeover switch 122SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing the setting value such as the jackpot winning probability (ball ejection rate) described later in the setting change state, and the open sensor 122SG090 that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3. Is provided.

The setting switching main body unit provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the lock switch 122SG051 and the setting changeover switch 122SG052, is housed in the board case 122SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 122SG051 and the setting changeover switch 122SG052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back left portion of the board case 122SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the board case 122SG201.

Since the board case 122SG201 having the lock switch 122SG051 and the setting changeover switch 122SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the gaming machine frame 3 in the closed state. It can be operated by opening the gaming machine frame 3 by using it. Further, since the lock switch 122SG051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch 122SG051. Further, the lock switch 122SG051 is also a switch capable of performing an ON / OFF switching operation and an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pushing operation) described later by a setting key. In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, the mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys is exemplified, but these may be shared by one key.

Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is not opened, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs and the like are included.

FIG. 9-3 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the staging control command used in the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 9-3 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-3 (A), the command 8001H is a first variation start command for designating the variation start in the special figure game using the first special diagram in the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the variation start in the special symbol game using the second special diagram in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variablely displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (variation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the fluctuation pattern designation command, different EXT data are set according to the fluctuation pattern to be designated and the like.

The command 8CXXH is a variation display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating a variation display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variation display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variation display result is "miss", "big hit", or "small hit". ) Or, different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variation display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variation display result designation command indicating a preliminary determination result that the variation display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state (high base state) in which the time reduction control is performed. , Time saving state) is used as the second game state specification command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) is determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) can be notified by the error notification process described later.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a big winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the large winning opening that notifies that the period during which the large winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data are set according to the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Will be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to identifiablely display the special figure reserved storage number on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number in order to identifiablely display the special figure reserved storage number on the image display device 5 or the like. The first hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12. The second hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating a newly set setting value from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12 (staging control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (recovery of power failure, also referred to as hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cleared the contents of the RAM 102 and started (cold start). The command E103H is a setting value change start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started the setting value changing operation (the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in the setting changing state). The command E104H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the setting value change operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completed. The command E105H is a setting value confirmation start notification command for notifying wp that the operation for confirming the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started (that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in the setting changed state). The command E106H is a set value confirmation end notification command for notifying that the setting value confirmation operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been completed.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip computer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program to perform control operations, and updates of numerical data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to perform, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data in which the CPU 103 is temporarily stored in the RAM 102. The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. And transmission operation to output various signals is also performed.

FIG. 9-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 9-4, in the feature unit 122SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR3 for determination, the random value MR4 for determining the normal map display result, and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also referred to as game random numbers.

In the present embodiment, each random value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 9-4, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each random value is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 9-5 shows the fluctuation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variation display result is "missing", the variation display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to each of the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", and also varies. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit". Further, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variation display result is a “small hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern") and varies. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “loss”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "big hit" is called a jackpot fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "small hit" is referred to as a small hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 9-5, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the super reach fluctuation patterns, super reach α and super reach β, are shown. Is set shorter than. Further, regarding the special figure variation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed in the present embodiment, the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach β is executed is In that case, the special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern are set so that the jackpot expectation that the fluctuation display result is "big hit" is set in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In addition, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are used, for example, a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, and the like. Instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type after determining first, only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided to determine these variations. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value for determining the pattern type, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the variation content (effect content) is predetermined for each variation pattern, but the present invention illustrates this. The variation content (effect content) may be different even if the variation pattern is the same, depending on the set value. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 of the normal reach loss, if the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern is the normal reach loss, and if the set value is 2, the pseudo continuous effect is performed. When the set value is 3 as the fluctuation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach loss, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed three times to obtain the fluctuation pattern that becomes super reach loss.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as a work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-6 and 9-7, which are prepared by the CPU 103 for performing various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variation display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (setting value 1) shown in FIG. 9-6 (A), the display result determination table (setting value 2) shown in FIG. 9-6 (B), and FIG. The display result determination table (set value 3) shown in -6 (C), the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), and the jackpot type determination shown in FIG. 9-7 (B). In addition to the table (for the second special symbol), the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table, the small hit fluctuation pattern judgment table, the loss fluctuation pattern judgment table, the normal map display result judgment table (not shown), and the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown). ) Etc. are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit and a small hit changes according to a set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit and the small hit is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. It has become. The set value is composed of three stages of 1 to 3, with 3 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 3, 2 and 1, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 3 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. In other words, as for the set value, 3 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the game field side, and the smaller the value in the order of 2 and 1, the more advantageous the value for the game field side.

9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, the display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure is used as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The individual display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C), in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability state), the normal state or the time saving state (low). More judgment values are assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" than in the case of "certain state". As a result, in the probabilistic state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability is determined (in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/150 when the set value is 2, and 1/99 when the set value is 3). In comparison, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state is higher (in the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment, when the set value is 1, the set value is 1/150, and the set value is If it is 2, it is 1/99, and if the set value is 3, it is 1/50). That is, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the probability that it is determined to control to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. Is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the determination value becomes high.

Further, in each display result determination table, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" depending on whether the game state is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). Judgment values are assigned so that the probabilities determined to be controlled in the small hit game are the same (for example, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/99 when the set value is 2, and the set value). If is 3, 1/50).

Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the special figure display result is set as "big hit" or "small hit", and the big hit gaming state or small hit. The probability that it will be determined to be controlled to the gaming state is low, and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the special figure display result is set as "big hit" or "small hit", and the big hit game state or small hit game. Judgment values are assigned so that the probability of being determined when the state is controlled is high (big hit probability and small hit probability: set value 3> set value 2> set value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C). If any of the hit determination values is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C), it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C) indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C), a mode in which the winning probability of the small hit is different is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning probability of a small hit is the same regardless of which display result determination table is used (regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1). May be.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit by using the display result determination table shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C). However, a big hit judgment table and a small hit judgment table are provided separately for each set value, and it is individually judged whether or not the variation display result is a big hit or a small hit. May be good. Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C), each display result determination table is assigned a determination value for a small hit, which is shown in FIG. 9-6 (A). The display result determination table (display result determination table referred to when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1) does not have to be assigned a determination value to the small hit. That is, the fact that the ratio of the small hit probability differs depending on the set value includes that the small hit probability is 0%.

In the present embodiment, a total of three setting values, 1 to 3, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 2 or 4 or more.

9-7 (A) and 9-7 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 9-7 (A) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when you do. Further, FIG. 9-7 (B) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-8. In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, the jackpot A (also referred to as non-probability variable jackpot) in which only the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state and the game shifts to the low probability high base state, and the jackpot game After the end, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed, and the jackpot B and the jackpot C (also referred to as the probabilistic jackpot) for shifting to the high-accuracy high-base state are set.

The big hit game state by "big hit A" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state which is advantageous for the player five times (so-called 5 rounds) and is repeatedly executed. The big hit game state by "B" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state advantageous to the player.

The time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "big hit A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Figure Ends when the game is in a big hit game state before the game is executed.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot B or the jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is the big hit B or the big hit C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit gaming state, so that the big hit gaming state is continuous without going through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs in.

In the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is 2. There may be less than one type, or four or more types.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is "1", the MR2 determination value ranges from 0 to 299. , 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 199 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 200-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 150-299 are assigned to jackpot C.

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Of the jackpot B and jackpot C for which both the probability variation control and the probability variation control are executed, the ratio of determining the jackpot C decreases in the order of the set values 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the ball ejection rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. When is 1, the ball output rate is the lowest.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination value of MR2 is 0 to 299. Of these, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 150-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. (A judgment value is not assigned to the jackpot B).

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Of the jackpot B and jackpot C for which both the probability variation control and the probability variation control are executed, the ratio of determining the jackpot C decreases in the order of the set values 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the ball ejection rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. When is 1, the ball output rate is the lowest.

In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the big hit type is determined to be big hit B. In other words, if the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, it means that one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%). Although it is included, even when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, a case may be provided in which the big hit type is determined to be the big hit B. ..

As described above, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result becomes a jackpot differs according to the set value, so that the game entertainment can be improved. It has become.

In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is not limited to this. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the jackpot probability and the small hit probability increase, and the jackpot C as the jackpot type is determined. The present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. ..

Further, the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the jackpot probability and the small hit probability change according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the game playability itself does not change. The present invention is not limited to this, and the playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320 and the probability change state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability change loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through, the game property (so-called V) in which the rate at which the game ball passes through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special map. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, although the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same as those set in 1 to 3, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability are higher than in the case where these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4) may be provided.

Further, in this way, when the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is switched to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect, and when the set value is 2 or 3, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (a game state is changed based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot game state).

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is predetermined to set the fluctuation display result to "big hit" and the fluctuation display result to be "small hit". A fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits, which is used when it is pre-determined, and a fluctuation pattern judgment table for loss, which is used when it is pre-determined to make the fluctuation display result "miss", are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) are used. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take.

As shown in FIGS. 9-9 (A) and 9-9 (B), the jackpot variation pattern determination table is a jackpot variation pattern determination table (big hit A) used when the jackpot type is jackpot A. The jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C) used when the jackpot type is for jackpot B and jackpot C is prepared in advance, and these jackpot variation pattern determination tables (for jackpot C) are prepared in advance. The fluctuation pattern judgment table for (for A) and the jackpot (for jackpot B and jackpot C) includes the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot. For each variation pattern of the variation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined random value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value.

As shown in FIG. 9-9 (A), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), when the set value is "1", 1 to 997 of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3. Up to 400 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), 401 to 850 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β. It is assigned to the jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3). When the set value is "2", 1 to 350 of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 351 to 825 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 826 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", 1 to 300 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 301 to 800 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 801 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 9-9 (B), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination values of MR3 is 1 to 997. 1 to 100 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), 101 to 350 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot. When the set value is "2", 1 to 150 of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 151 to 450 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 451 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", 1 to 200 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 201 to 550 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

In this way, when the jackpot A is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2) determines the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). It is higher than that and lowers in the order of set values 3, 2, and 1. Further, when the jackpot B or the jackpot C is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) determines the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2). It is higher than the ratio and lowers in the order of the set values 3, 2, and 1.

That is, in the present embodiment, when these determination values are the jackpot type "big hit B" or "big hit C", the super reach β is easily determined, and the jackpot type is "big hit A". In this case, the player is assigned so that the super reach α can be easily determined, so that when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player may be “big hit B” or “big hit C”. It is possible to raise the expectation of.

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value is the determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, the range of the determination value of MR3 is 0 to 0 regardless of whether the set value is 1, 2, or 3. Of the 997s, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit fluctuation pattern (PC1-1). Although only PC1-1 is provided as the variation pattern of the small hit in the present invention, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the variation pattern of the small hit. The fluctuation pattern of the small hit may be determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns at different ratios with the set values 1, 2, and 3.

Further, the variation pattern determination table for loss includes the variation pattern determination table A for loss, which is used when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time reduction control, and the low base. The variation pattern determination table B for loss used when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and the variation for loss used when the total number of reserved storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state. A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table D for loss, which is used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed, are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the super reach. A predetermined random value within the range that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of β loss.

As shown in FIG. 9-10 (A), in the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss (for low-base medium total pending storage number of 1 or less), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 is determined. Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701. Up to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", 1 to 400 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 401 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "3", 1 to 350 of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the variation pattern determination table B for loss, a shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), a normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and a super reach corresponding to a total reserved storage number of 2 to 4 are obtained. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

As shown in FIG. 9-10 (B), in the variation pattern determination table B for loss (for low-base medium total pending storage number 2 to 4), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3. Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1). 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", 1 to 450 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 401 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the variation pattern determination table C for loss, a shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), a normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and a super reach corresponding to a total reserved storage number of 5 to 8 are obtained. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

As shown in FIG. 9-10 (C), in the fluctuation pattern determination table C for loss (for low-base medium total pending storage number of 5 or more), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 is determined. Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701. Up to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", 1 to 500 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "3", 1 to 450 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the variation pattern determination table D for loss, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach loss (PA1-4), the variation pattern of the normal reach loss (PA2-1), and the variation pattern of the super reach α loss corresponding to the time reduction control (PA1-4). A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the variation pattern (PA2-3) of PA2-2) and super reach β loss.

As shown in FIG. 9-10 (D), in the fluctuation pattern determination table D for loss (for high base and medium), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination values of MR3 is 1 to 997. 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", 1 to 500 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "3", 1 to 450 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

As described above, when the loss pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is higher than that of determining the super reach fluctuation pattern, and the ratio of determining the normal reach fluctuation pattern is higher. , The set values 3, 2, and 1 are lowered in this order. When the fluctuation pattern judgment tables A to D for loss are used, 701 to 900 of the judgment values are the fluctuation patterns of super reach α loss, and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss regardless of the fluctuation pattern judgment table. If each of the fluctuation patterns is assigned, that is, if the fluctuation display result is lost, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined by a common determination ratio regardless of the set value, so that the fluctuation pattern of the super reach It is possible to prevent the effect from being deteriorated due to the fact that the variable display is not executed.

The "common decision ratio" in the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment is different from the one in which the determination ratio is completely the same with different set values (the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment) and different set values. (For example, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach differs by about 1% between the set value 1 and the set value 3).

In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the embodiment in which the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value is exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the variation display result is lost, the determination ratio of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is the same regardless of the set value set. It may be present, or only the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of either non-reach or normal reach may be the same.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach α loss and the variation pattern of the super reach β loss are determined regardless of the set value. Although the embodiment in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is a loss, the super reach α is exemplified. The determination ratio of only one of the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the loss and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss may be the same regardless of the set value.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, both the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach β loss are both regardless of the set value. Is exemplified regardless of the set value set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value is set even when the variable display result is a big hit. Regardless of the set value, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

In the present embodiment, when the variation display result is lost, the embodiment in which the determination ratio of the variation pattern of non-reach or normal reach differs depending on the set value is illustrated, but it is set. Depending on the set value, there may be one or a plurality of undetermined fluctuation patterns among the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern. In other words, if the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value, one of the fluctuation patterns should not be determined (the determination ratio is 0%), or a specific fluctuation pattern is 100%. It is also included to determine by the ratio of.

The variation time of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the variation of the non-reach loss is shorter than the variation pattern (PA1-2). The pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 9-5). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. Occasionally, by winning a start, it becomes difficult for a useless start prize that is not stored on hold to occur, and when the number of stored memories decreases, the fluctuation time is long and the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening ( By determining PA1-1), it becomes possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the variable display is not executed because the variable display time becomes long.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-10 (A) to 9-10 (C), variations are made using a variation pattern determination table for loss, which differs depending on the total number of reserved storages. Although the embodiment for determining the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reserved storage number in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first A variation pattern may be determined using a variation pattern determination table for loss, which differs depending on the number of reserved storages of the special symbol and the number of pending storages of the second special symbol when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed.

Further, in the variation pattern determination table for each loss of the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the super reach loss is set regardless of the numerical value of 1 to 3 set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The range of random value assigned to (PA2-2 and PA2-3) is the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the loss probability differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the fluctuation display is actually executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss (the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss). Appearance rate) differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It should be noted that the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the rate at which the variation display is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach loss differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The present invention is not limited to this, and in consideration of the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, the variable display is super reach loss at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be executed in a fluctuation pattern.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 9-1 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). To. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area includes a first special figure holding storage unit, a second special drawing holding storage unit, a normal drawing holding storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter. It has a setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

In the first special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but the special drawing has not been started yet. The reserved data of the game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and satisfies the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the variation display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the above, are used as pending data. It is stored until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated, but the special drawing has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and satisfies the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the variation display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the above, are used as pending data. The number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start opening data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal map holding storage unit is associated with the hold number in the order in which the game balls pass through the passing gate, and is used for determining the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can update the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

Random numbers that are not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4, are stored as random count values in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, and are periodically executed according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated targetly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Next, the game control main process in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 9-11 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (122SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (122SGSa002). The initial setting includes a stack pointer setting, a register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), a parallel input / output port, etc.), a setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON (122SGSa003). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the clear switch is ON (122SGSa003; Y), the process proceeds to 122SGSa014. Further, when the clear switch is OFF (122SGSa003; N), it is further determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (122SGSa004). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a process of protecting the data of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. When the backup flag is OFF and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa004; N), the process proceeds to 122SGSa014.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa004; Y), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (122SGSa005). .. In 122SGSa005, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data of the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (122SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 122SGSa014.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa005; Y), the CPU 103 sets an effect control board start wait timer for waiting during the period until the effect control board 12 starts (122SGSa006). Then, the value of the effect control board start wait timer is decremented by -1 (122SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the effect control board start wait timer has timed out (122SGSa008). When the timer for waiting for the start of the effect control board is not out (122SGSa008; N), 122SGSa007 is executed again and the effect control board 12 waits for a period until the start. Further, when the timer for waiting for the start of the effect control board is out (122SGSa008; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa009).

When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa009; Y), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor 122SG090 is ON, that is, whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 is open (122SGSa009a). When the open sensor 122SG090 is ON (122SGSa009a; Y), the set value confirmation process for displaying the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed on the display monitor 122SG029, and the clerk of the game hall or the like displays it. By visually recognizing the monitor 122SG029, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed (setting change state) (122SGSa010). When the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa009; N) or the release sensor is OFF (122SGSa009a; N), the process proceeds to 122SGSa011 after the set value confirmation process is executed. That is, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, when the clear switch is activated without being operated, the set value is confirmed if the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened even if the lock switch 122SG051 is ON. It is impossible.

In 122SGSa011, the CPU 103 performs a recovery process for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is being changed, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered (started by hot start) in the state before the power failure, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a hot start notification command to the staging control board 12, and proceeds to 122SGSa021. (122SGSa013).

In 122SGSa014, the CPU 103 sets a timer for waiting for the start of the effect control board for waiting during the period until the effect control board 12 starts. Then, the value of the effect control board start wait timer is decremented by -1 (122SGSa015), and it is determined whether or not the effect control board start wait timer has timed out (122SGSa016). When the timer for waiting for the start of the effect control board is not out (122SGSa016; N), the effect control board 12 is executed again and waits for a period until the effect control board 12 is started. Further, when the timer for waiting for the start of the effect control board is out (122SGSa016; Y), the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear process (122SGSa017) for clearing the contents of the RAM 102, and then the lock switch 122SG051 is turned on. It is determined whether or not there is (122SGSa018).

When the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa018; N), the CPU 103 sends a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 and proceeds to 122SGsa021, assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started at the cold start (12SGsa018; N). 122SGSa019).

Further, when the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa019; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the release sensor 122SG090 is ON (122SGSa019a). When the open sensor is ON (122SGSa019a; Y), that is, when the gaming machine frame 3 is open, the setting change process for changing the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (122SGSa020). Is executed, and the process proceeds to 122SGSa021. That is, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, when the clear switch is operated and activated, the set value cannot be changed unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened even if the lock switch 122SG051 is ON. ing.

When the open sensor 122SG090 is OFF in 122SGSa019a, it is assumed that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, and a cold start notification command is transmitted to the staging control board 12 to proceed to 122SGSa021 (122SGSa019).

In 122SGSa021, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104. Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set (122SGSa022) so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the interrupt is permitted (122SGSa023). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 9-12 is a flowchart showing a set value confirmation process executed by the CPU 103. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first transmits a set value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa031), and is stored in the address F001 (see FIG. 9-13 (B)) in the RAM 102. The set value is displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa032). Then, it is determined whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa033). When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa033; N), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the 122SGSa033 to wait until the lock switch 122SG051 is turned OFF.

When the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa051; N), the CPU 103 ends the display of the set value on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa034) and issues a set value confirmation end notification command to the staging control board 12. It is transmitted and the set value confirmation process is completed (122SGSa035).

In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, by ending the setting confirmation state (ending the setting value confirmation process), the state is the same as when starting with a normal hot start, so that the process of 122SGSa035 is performed. The command transmitted to the effect control board 12 may be a hot start notification command.

FIG. 9-13 (A) is a flowchart showing a RAM clear process executed by the CPU 103. In the RAM clearing process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the data stored in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa041). When the data stored in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa041; N), it is further determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa042). When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa042; Y), the CPU 103 specifies the second address from the beginning in the RAM 102 and proceeds to 122SGSa045 (122SGSa043).

On the other hand, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or when the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa042; N), the first address in the RAM 102 is specified and the process proceeds to 122SGSa045 (122SGSa044).

In 122SGSa045, the CPU 103 sets (stores) "00H" at the specified address. In particular, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or when there is no backup data (122SGSa042; N), "00H" is set in the address F000, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 automatically sets a value. 1 is set. Then, it is determined whether or not the designated address is the last address of the RAM 102 (FXXX described later) (122SGSa046). If the specified address is not the last address in RAM 102 (122SGSa046; N), specify the next address in RAM 102 and proceed to 122SGSa045 (122SGSa047), if the specified address is the last address in RAM 102 (122SGSa046). Y) ends the RAM clearing process.

As shown in FIG. 9-13 (B), the RAM 102 in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment is assigned an address (F000 to FXXX) for each storage area. Of these storage areas, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102, and the second address (F001) from the head of the RAM 102 is described later. Temporary setting value is stored. Furthermore, at other addresses (F002, F003, etc.), in addition to clear switch backup information that can specify whether or not the clear switch was ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started, special figure hold storage and normal figure hold The storage, the values of various counters, various timers, various flags, and game information including error information generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are stored. The backup data (including the backup flag) is stored in a specific backup data storage area among the areas in which other information is stored. Further, a value indicating a factory-shipped state (for example, a set value "0") is set in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102 at the time of factory shipment. If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a state where the value indicating the factory default state is set in the first address (F000) of the RAM 102, the setting change process may be executed without fail, or the image may be executed. You may be urged to restart the pachinko gaming machine 1 for executing the setting change process by displaying on the display device 5 or the like.

That is, the RAM clear processing in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment is an address (F001 to FXXX) excluding the address (F000) in which the set value is stored when there is no abnormality in the RAM 102 and there is backup data. ) Clears data other than the set value by storing "00H", but if there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 or there is no backup data, "00H" is stored in all the addresses (F000 to FXXX) in the RAM 102. It is a process to clear all the data including the set value by storing.

In the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment, the set value is stored in the address F000 at the beginning of the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value is stored in the last address of the RAM 102. May be good. When the set value is stored in the last address of the RAM 102 in this way, immediately before the last address of the RAM 102 as the address for clearing the data when the RAM clear process shown in FIG. 9-13 (A) is executed. It is sufficient to specify the address of and store "00H" sequentially from the address F000 to the address immediately before the address.

Further, the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the data excluding the set value of the RAM 102 is cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, but the present invention is limited to this. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, only the gaming information stored in the predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F003 in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment) is cleared. You may do it.

Further, the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the clear switch backup information is stored in the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the clear switch backup information is used for game control. A process for storing or reading clear switch backup information in the RAM 102 by storing it in a register of the microcomputer 100 (for example, an accumulator that is the center of calculation, a flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, or a general-purpose register). May be omitted so that the processing load of the CPU 103 can be reduced. When the clear switch backup information is stored in the RAM 102, the degree of freedom of the register can be improved as compared with the case where the clear switch backup information is stored in the register of the game control microcomputer 100, so that the clear switch backup information is stored in the CPU 103. It is possible to prevent the process from being overwritten with other information (data).

FIG. 9-14 is a flowchart showing a setting change process executed by the CPU 103. In the setting change process, the CPU 103 first sends a setting value change start notification command to the staging control board 12 (122SGSa051). The set value change start notification command may be transmitted immediately before the set value change process is started (at the timing when the lock switch 122SG051 is determined to be ON in 122SGsa018). Then, the set value stored in the address F000 (see FIG. 9-13 (B)) in the RAM 102 is specified (122SGSa052), and the specified set value is displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa053).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting changeover switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054). When the setting changeover switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054), the content of the address F001 in the RAM 102 is updated (122SGSa055). Specifically, when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "1", "2", which is a setting value one step more advantageous to the player than the "1", is set as a temporary setting value. When the set value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "2", the set value "3", which is one step more advantageous for the player than the "2", is provisionally set. It is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a set value. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "3", "1" may be stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a temporary set value.

Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (provisional set value) stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa056), and determines whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057). When there is no operation of the setting changeover switch in 122SGSa054 (122SGSa054; N), the process of 122SGSa057 is executed without executing the processes of 122SGSa055 and 122SGSa056.

When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057; Y), the CPU 103 is stored in the address F001 or the process of storing a new temporary setting value in the address F001 of the RAM 102 by repeatedly executing the processes of the 122SGSa054 to 122SGsa056. The process of displaying the set value on the display monitor 122SG029 is executed.

When the lock switch is OFF in 122SGSa057 (122SGSa057; N), the CPU 103 stores the set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 in the address F000. That is, the CPU 103 stores the set value stored in the address F001 (temporary set value displayed in the display monitor 122SG029) in the address F000, so that the set value stored in the address F001 is set as the present set value. (Change the set value of the pachinko game machine 1). Then, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value designation command according to the setting value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102 and a setting value change end notification command to the staging control board 12 to end the setting change process. (122SGSa059, 122SGSa060).

In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the setting value change end notification command is transmitted to the staging control board 12 in the setting change processing is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the setting value change end notification command may be transmitted to the staging control board 12 within the game control main process (immediately after the setting change process is completed).

In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, by turning off the lock switch 122SG051, a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (a temporary set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102). Is illustrated in the address F000), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening, the operation of the clear switch, the pushing operation of the lock switch 122SG051 and the like are exemplified. By turning off the lock switch 122SG051 after executing the operation of, a new set value may be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started from the cold start or is started in the setting change state, the cold start notification command or the setting value change start is sent to the effect control board 12. Although the embodiment in which the RAM clear process is executed before the notification command is transmitted is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear process is a cold start notification to the effect control board 12. It may be executed after sending a command or a setting value change start notification command.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the RAM clear processing is executed before the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear process is executed again after the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed (other than the set value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102). (Clear the data of). By doing so, it is possible to prevent problems such as the game being started while the invalid data is stored in the RAM.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is started after executing a common RAM clear process (122SGSa017) between the case of starting the pachinko game machine 1 in the cold start and the case of starting it in the setting change state. An example is an example in which a command corresponding to a state (cold start notification command, setting value change start notification command, or setting value change end notification command) is transmitted to the effect control board 12, but the present invention is limited to this. The command according to the activated state (cold start notification command, setting value change start notification command, setting value change) depends on whether the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start or in the setting change state. A common RAM clear process may be executed after the end notification command) is transmitted to the effect control board 12.

Next, the game control timer interrupt processing in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIGS. 9-15, the CPU 103 first executes the power supply cutoff detection process (122SGS020) in the game control timer interrupt process, and then executes the switch process (S21) to the command control process (S27). .. As shown in FIGS. 9-16, in the power supply cutoff detection process, the CPU 103 first receives an input of a power supply cutoff signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped to a predetermined value or less. Is determined (122SGSa051). If there is no power off signal input (122SGSa051; N), the process ends, and if there is a power off signal input (122SGSa051; Y), the backup data including the set value stored in the RAM 102 is specified. (122SGS053), the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 102 (122SGS053). Then, after creating check data to be used when recovering the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (122SGS054), the process proceeds to a loop process in which no process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off.

Next, the staging control main process in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 9-17 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120. In the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (122SGS401a) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and CTC (counter / timer) mounted on the effect control board 12. Set the register of the circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (122SGS401b). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a command reception waiting timer according to the reception waiting period of the command transmitted from the main board 11 (122SGS402). Then, the value of the command reception waiting timer is decremented by -1 (122SGS403), and it is determined whether or not the command reception waiting timer has timed out (122SGS404). When the command reception waiting timer is timered out (122SGS404; N), the processes of 122SGS403 and 122SGS404 are repeatedly executed, and the command reception waiting timer waits until the timer is out.

Then, when the command reception waiting timer goes out (122SGS404; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hot start notification command is received (122SGS405). When the hot start notification command is received (122SGS405; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restored to power failure, the player information stored in the RAM 122 (the player in the player information input processing described later). After receiving the input of information, the information including the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 122 is cleared) and the process proceeds to 122SGS417 (122SGS406).

When the hot start notification command is not received (122SGS405; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the cold notification command is received (122SGS407). When the cold notification command is received (122SGS407; Y), the player information and the production information stored in the RAM 122 (the number of fluctuations and the number of big hits stored in the RAM 122 since the last start of the pachinko game machine 1). (Information including the number of times of super reach) was cleared (122SGS408), and the information stored in the RAM 102 was cleared, and the player information and the production information stored in the RAM 122 were cleared. The RAM clear notification process for performing the notification (execution of the RAM clear notification) is executed (122SGS409). In the RAM clear notification process, the image display on the image display device 5, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, the sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R, etc. are performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. It suffices if it is possible to notify the clerk of the game hall or the like that the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. Then, after the RAM clear notification process is executed, the process proceeds to 122SGS417.

Further, when the cold start notification command is not received (122SGS407; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting value change start notification command is received (122SGS410). When the setting value change start notification command is received (122SGS410; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, notification that the setting value change operation is in progress (notification during setting value change). ) Is being executed while the setting value is being changed (122SGS411). In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the game machine frame 122SG003 is generally open, and the clerk of the game hall or the like who changes the setting value is the main board 11. The display monitor 122SG029 mounted on the machine is being visually recognized. That is, the setting change state is a state in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized by the clerk of the game hall who changes the set value, so that the clerk of the game hall displays the image. From the display of the device 5, it is considered that it is not possible to determine whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state. Therefore, as a notification during the setting value change, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state to the clerk of the game hall who changes the set value by the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the light emission of the game effect lamp 9. All you have to do is notify that you are doing so.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the set value change end notification command and the set value designation command have been received, that is, whether or not the set value of the set value has been completed (122SGS412). When the setting value change end notification command and the setting value specification command are received (122SGS412), the setting value newly set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the received setting value specification command (setting stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102) is received. (Value) is specified, and the specified set value is updated and stored in the RAM 122 as set value information (values of "1" to "3" according to the set value) (122SG413). Then, after executing the above-mentioned processes of 122SGS408 and 122SGS409, the process proceeds to 122SGS417. If at least one of the set value change end notification command and the set value specification command is not received (122SGS412; N), the processes of 122SGS411 and 122SGS412 are repeatedly executed.

Note that the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the RAM 122 is cleared after the setting value changing notification is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting value changing notification is used. RAM 122 may be cleared in parallel. If the clearing of the RAM 122 is completed during the execution of the setting value changing notification, the RAM clear notification may be executed in parallel with the setting value changing notification, or the RAM is cleared after the setting value changing notification is completed. Notification may be executed.

Further, when the setting value change start notification command is not received (122SGS410; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting value confirmation start notification command is received, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state. It is determined whether or not it has been started (122SGS414). When the setting value confirmation start notification command is received (122SGS414; Y), the setting value confirmation notification process for notifying that the setting confirmation state (the setting value can be confirmed from the display monitor 122SG029) is performed. Execute (122SGS415). In the notification processing during confirmation of the set value, the clerk of the game hall who started the pachinko game machine 1 by displaying the image on the image display device 5, emitting the light of the game effect lamp 9, sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R, etc. It suffices if it is possible to notify the surroundings of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that the setting is confirmed. If the effect control CPU 120 does not receive the setting value confirmation end notification command (122SGS410; N), it proceeds to the processing of the 122SGS405, and proceeds to the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value change start notification command, and the setting. It waits until any command of the value confirmation start notification command is received (the processing of 122SGS405, 122SGS407, 122SGS410, 122SGS414 is repeatedly executed).

As described above, in the effect control main process in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-18, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start state or the setting change state, the player information ( While clearing the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. since the input of the player information is received from the RAM 122, the information for directing (the number of fluctuations since the previous start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of big hits, etc.) The RAM 122 does not clear the setting value information (a numerical value of any of "1" to "3" corresponding to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) and the setting value information (such as the number of times of super reach). Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the player information and the effect information are cleared from the RAM 122, but the set value information is not cleared from the RAM 122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, the player information and the effect information are not cleared from the RAM 122, while the set value information is the set value information already stored in the RAM 122. It is designed to be overwritten (updated and stored).

That is, in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, the information to be cleared from the RAM 122 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start, cold start, setting confirmation state, or setting change state.

In the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, the player information and the staging information are cleared, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state. Illustrates a form in which the player information and the staging information are not cleared, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, the game is played. The person information and the information for directing may be cleared.

Returning to FIG. 9-17, in 122SGS417, the effect control CPU 120 identifies which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value change end notification command, and the set value confirmation end notification command is received, and displays an image. The device 5 starts displaying the initial symbol corresponding to the received command. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-19, when the received command is a hot start notification command, a setting value confirmation end notification command, or a cold start notification command, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a new setting value. If it is not set, the display of the decorative symbol is started on the image display device 5 with a combination of "1", "2", and "3" from the left as the initial symbol. Further, when the received command is a setting value change end notification command, that is, when there is a possibility that a new setting value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 is displayed as an initial symbol from the left. The display of the decorative pattern is started by the combination of "4", "5", and "6".

In the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment, if there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 has "4" and "5" as initial symbols from the left. , And "6" are used to illustrate a form in which the display of the decorative pattern is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value advantageous to the player (for example, "1") is used. When set, the setting value that is disadvantageous to the player is a combination of "4", "5", and "6" as the initial symbol at a higher rate than when (for example, "3") is set. It may be displayed. By doing so, it can be suggested that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set with a set value advantageous to the player, and the gaming interest can be improved.

In the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment, if there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 has "4" and "5" as initial symbols from the left. , And "6" are used to illustrate a form in which the display of the decorative pattern is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value advantageous to the player (for example, "1") is used. The initial symbol displayed on the image display device 5 may be different depending on whether the set value is set or a set value that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, "3") is set. Further, depending on whether a setting value advantageous to the player (for example, "1") is set or a setting value disadvantageous to the player (for example, "3") is set, the speakers 8L and 8R are used. The volume of the output sound, the amount of light of the game effect lamp 9, and the like may be different.

Then, returning to FIG. 9-17, the CPU 120 for effect control sets "4" in the pre-reading restriction counter in order to restrict the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the first four fluctuations (122SGS418). After that, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to a loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (122SGS419). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (on), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (122SGS420) and executes the following processing.

First, the effect control CPU 120 executes a start notification process for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started (122SGS421). In the activation notification process, for example, it is determined whether or not the interruption is the first interruption from the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. If it is the first interrupt from the start of the pachinko game machine 1, specify which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value change end notification command, and the set value confirmation end notification command has been received, and then specify which of the interrupts has been received. The start notification process table corresponding to the received command is selected, and the start notification process timer corresponding to the received command is started. Then, after starting the start notification process timer, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started based on the value of the start notification process timer and the start notification process table by executing the start notification process in the next interruption or later. All you have to do is execute the notification.

In the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment, the command received at the time of starting the pachinko gaming machine 1 is one of a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a set value change end notification command, and a set value confirmation end notification command. The mode of the activation notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different depending on the presence or absence.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-20, when the hot start notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is new. If the set value is not set, the gaming effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R output the output sound A for 30 seconds. The light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and the output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same, but the light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds. The output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

Further, when the cold start notification command is received when starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, when a new setting value is not set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the data in the RAM 102 is cleared. The game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R output the output sound B for 30 seconds. The light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds is the same as the output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, but the light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds. The output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

That is, the specific control in the present invention means that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start or setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 emits light from the gaming effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L, 8R for 30 seconds. Output sound of A is executed, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start, the effect control CPU 120 emits light of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the output sound of the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds. Includes both performing the output of B.

Further, when the setting value change end notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, that is, when there is a possibility that a new setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming effect. The lamp 9 emits light for 40 seconds, the output sound C is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds, and the image display device 5 displays a message image for 40 seconds (for example, a message image indicating that the setting value has been changed). To execute. Although the light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 are the same. The light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 may be different.

In particular, when the setting value change end notification command is received when starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the hot start notification command or the cold start notification command is received when starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, since the message image is displayed on the image display device 5, it is easy to recognize that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed.

That is, the special control in the present invention means that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the effect control CPU 120 emits light from the gaming effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds. It refers to the output of C and the display of the message image for 40 seconds in the image display device 5.

As described above, since the light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9, the sound output start timing of the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image display start timing of the image display device 5 are the same, these pachinko games Regarding the notification mode when the machine 1 is started, the notification period is 60 seconds when the hot start notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is received (when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by the hot start), and the cold start notification command. Is received (when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start), the notification period is 60 seconds, and when the setting value change end notification command is received (when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with the setting changed state). The period is 40 seconds.

The feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the activation notification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated is executed by using the gaming effect lamps 9, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the image display device 5. The present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an external output terminal capable of outputting a signal to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall or a counter for each machine, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated. As a start notification at the time of this, a signal that can identify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started may be output from the external output terminal to the management device.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of this embodiment, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in any of the hot start, cold start, setting change state, and setting confirmation state, some devices that execute the start notification are common. Although a certain form (in each case, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed) is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is hot. The device that executes the start notification differs depending on whether the machine is started in the start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the cold start, the image display device 5 is used. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the setting changed, a signal may be output from the above-mentioned external output terminal to the management device, etc.).

Further, the notification mode of each device that executes the activation notification may be different depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by a cold start, all the gaming effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are made to emit light, while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated with the setting changed. In this case, only a part of the game effect lamp 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made to emit light.

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, since the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is in the open state, sound is output from only one of the speakers 8L and 8R (to the pachinko gaming machine 1). If three or more pachinko machines are provided, sound is output only from some of the pachinko machines), and if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start, the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is closed. Since there are many cases, the sound may be output from all the speakers 8L and 8R. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, the image display device 5 displays a message image indicating that the setting is being changed, such as "setting is being changed", while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When started at the start, the image display device 5 may display a message image indicating that the RAM 102 or the RAM 122 has been cleared, such as "RAM has been cleared".

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a plurality of the above-mentioned external output terminals, the terminals for outputting signals to the management device may be different according to each notification. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the period until the setting value change is completed (until the setting value change end notification command or the setting value specification command is received) as the notification during the setting value change. A signal is output to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the setting change over a period of time), and after the change of the setting value is completed, a signal is output to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the error or RAM clear as a RAM clear notification. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, it is only necessary to output a signal to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the error or the RAM clear as the RAM clear notification.

When the external output terminal is used in common for each notification, the timing of outputting the signal to the management device may be different according to each notification.

As described above, the activation notification process exemplifies a mode in which the activation notification mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 differs depending on the received command, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these pachinko gaming machines 1 are not limited thereto. The activation notification of may be executed in the notification mode of 1 regardless of the received command. Further, the start notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 exemplifies a mode in which it is executed regardless of which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value confirmation end notification command, and the set value change end notification command is received. The present invention is not limited to this, and among these hot start notification commands, cold start notification commands, set value confirmation end notification commands, and set value change end notification commands, even if they are received, the pachinko gaming machine 1 A command that does not execute the start notification may be provided.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment, as an initialization effect in the present invention, a different mode of activation notification is executed according to a command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed. Although a mode in which a different combination of decorative patterns is displayed on the image display device 5 according to a command received when the is activated is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and is used as an initialization effect. The mode of activation notification and the combination of decorative symbols may be all different depending on the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or only a part thereof may be the same.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start or is started in a setting confirmation state, these start notifications are given. May not be executed.

Returning to FIG. 9-17, the staging control CPU 120 then executes the power supply cutoff detection process (122SGS422). In the power supply cutoff detection process, as shown in FIG. 9-22, the staging control CPU 120 first has an input of a power supply cutoff signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped to a predetermined value or less. It is determined whether or not (122SGS431). If there is no power cutoff signal input (122SGS431; N), the process ends, and if there is a power cutoff signal input (122SGS431; Y), the set value information, player information, etc. stored in the RAM 122 are input. The backup data to be included is specified (122SGS432), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (122SGS433). Then, after creating check data to be used when recovering the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (122SGS434), the process proceeds to a loop process in which no process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off.

Returning to FIG. 9-17, the staging control CPU 120 then analyzes the received staging control command and performs a process of setting a flag corresponding to the received staging control command (command analysis process: 122SGS423). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the contents of the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the receive command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis process, which command (see FIG. 9-3) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect control process process (122SGS424). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the image display device 5 is executed.

Next, a random number update process for effect (122SGS425) that updates the count value of the counter for generating a random number for effect such as a random number for determining a jackpot symbol, a player information input process (122SGS426) that accepts input of player information, and a game. The player information output process (122SGS427) for outputting the person information and the effect information aggregation process (122SGS428) for aggregating the effect information are executed. After that, it shifts to S52.

In the player information input process, the effect control CPU 120 uses a password (a password generated in advance by an external server in which the player's game information is stored) by operating the player's stick controller 31A or push button 31B. The player can access the server by using a communication terminal such as a smartphone and receive the generated password), and stores the player information specified from the password in the RAM 122. Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. as the player information stored each time the variation display, the jackpot game, and the super reach are executed.

In the player information output processing, the effect control CPU 120 generates a two-dimensional code based on the player information stored in the RAM 122 by operating the player's stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, and the two-dimensional code. Is displayed on the image display device 5. Then, after the display of the two-dimensional code is completed, the player information stored in the RAM 122 is cleared. The player can read the two-dimensional code displayed on the image display device 5 on a mobile terminal such as a smartphone, and transmit the player information aggregated in this game to an external server to play the pachinko game machine. The cumulative player information in 1 can be stored in the server.

In the staging information aggregation process, the staging control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of jackpots, the number of superreach, etc. stored in the RAM 122 as staging information each time the variation display, the jackpot game, and the super reach are executed. do.

Next, the staging control process processing in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-22, in the staging control process process, the staging control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the read-ahead restriction counter is “0” (122SGS441). When the value of the look-ahead restriction counter is "0" (122SGS441; Y), any of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) according to the effect control process flag after executing the look-ahead advance notice setting process (S161). Execute the process.

Further, when the value of the read-ahead restriction counter is any one of "1" to "4" (122SGS441; N), it is further determined whether or not the value of the staging control process flag is "1" (122SGS442). ). When the value of the effect control process flag is any of "0", "2" to "7" (122SGS442; N), any of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) according to the effect control process flag. When the process is executed and the value of the effect control process flag is "1" (122SGS442; Y), the value of the read-ahead restriction counter is decremented by -1 (122SGS443), and S170 to S177 (S170 to S177) are set according to the effect control process flag. (See FIG. 7), any of the processes is executed. By executing the processes of 122SGS441 to 122SGS443 as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 immediately after the start-up, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted until the variation display is executed four times.

In the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control main process and the effect control process process based on the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the variation display is performed four times. Although the embodiment of restricting the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 performs the start winning prize determination process based on the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1. By not executing (see 5), the execution of the pre-reading notice effect may be restricted over the four variable displays.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG in the present embodiment, regardless of whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the cold start or in the setting change state, the gaming progress is involved based on the fact that the gaming is possible. As a setting, a mode in which the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted over four variable displays is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is set whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start. Based on the fact that the game is possible regardless of whether it is started in the changed state, the settings related to the progress of the game depend on the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the amount of light of the game effect lamp 9, and the RTC. The setting of the effect may be set to the state at the time of shipment from the factory.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 122SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the effect control CPU 120 is the super reach A or the super reach B as the first suggestion effect. It is possible to execute the reach effect and the reach effect of Super Reach C and Super Reach D as the second suggestion effect, and when executing the reach effect of Super Reach C and Super Reach D, the Super Reach C is performed. Since the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach C or the super reach D is notified from the start of the reach effect of the super reach D, the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect can be notified, and the effect of the effect. Can be improved.

The present embodiment also includes the invention 122SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as pachinko gaming machines, for example, there are those described in JP-A-2016-4-2880 and those described in JP-A-2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in JP-A-2016-42880 and JP-A-2010-20092, when the gaming machine is turned on and started (power supply to the gaming machine is started). (When), a command (control information) output from the main board to the effect control board (effect control means) in order to restore the gaming machine based on the memory that the main board (game control board) is backed up. And, regardless of the memory that the main board is backed up, the command output from the main board to the effect control board in order to clear the backed up memory, and the state in which the setting value of the gaming machine can be changed. If the command output from the main board to the effect control board is the same, the effect control board will be appropriate according to the activation state when the gaming machine is turned on and started. There was a problem that various processes could not be executed. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the invention 122SG that solves the problem.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, CPU 103) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) by performing a predetermined operation executes a setting change process shown in FIGS. 9-14. The part to do) and
A game control means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) which can control the progress of the game and can execute the control to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means. The part to do) and
A backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) that can retain the stored contents for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.
The effect control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can clear the RAM shown in FIG. 9-17) capable of controlling the effect based on the control information output from the game control means (for example, the effect control command shown in FIG. 9-3). Notification processing, setting value changing notification processing, setting value confirmation notification processing, etc.) and
Equipped with
The first activation of the gaming control means is restored based on the storage contents stored in the backup storage means as an activation state when the power supply to the gaming machine is started after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. It is possible to set the state (for example, hot start), the second activation state (for example, cold start) in which the stored contents are erased and restored regardless of the stored contents stored in the backup storage means, and the setting means. It becomes one of the third activation states (for example, the setting change state), and different control information corresponding to the activation state is output to the effect control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-14). When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by the hot start, the CPU 103 sends a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by the cold start, the CPU 103 is the effect control board. When a cold start notification command is sent to 12 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the CPU 103 sends a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, the staging control means can execute appropriate processing according to the activation state of the gaming control means when the power supply is started. ..

Furthermore, as means 2 of the invention 122SG,
A staging control storage means (for example, RAM 122) capable of storing information used by the staging control means is provided.
Of the information stored in the staging control storage means, the information to be erased differs depending on whether the activation state to which the control information corresponds is the second activation state or the third activation state (the information stored in the staging control storage means is different). For example, as shown in FIGS. 9-18, the information cleared from the RAM 102 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start, cold start, setting confirmation state, or setting change state).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to perform appropriate erasing according to the activation state.

Furthermore, as means 3 of the invention 122SG,
The game control means can output control information (for example, a set value change end notification command) that specifies the end of the third activation state.
The staging control means performs special control according to the end of the third activated state based on the output of the control information designating the end of the third activated state (for example, shown in FIG. 9-20). As described above, based on the reception of the setting value change end notification command, the effect control CPU 120 emits light for 40 seconds from the game effect lamp 9 and outputs sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R in the start notification process. Then, the image display device 5 displays a message image for 40 seconds (for example, a message image indicating that the setting value has been changed).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to recognize that the third activation state in which the set value can be set has ended by the special control.

Furthermore, as means 4 of the invention 122SG,
When the control information corresponding to the first activation state or the second activation state is output, the staging control means performs specific control according to the output (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-20, is hot). A part in which the CPU 120 for effect control executes light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R in the start notification process based on the reception of the start notification command and the cold start notification command).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to recognize that the set value cannot be set in the activated state by the specific control.

Furthermore, as means 5 of the invention 122SG,
The effect control means performs different control depending on the activation state to which the control information corresponds (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-20, the effect control CPU 120 receives the hot start notification command. The effect control CPU 120 is based on the part that executes the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the output of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R in the start notification process and the cold start notification command. For effect control based on the part that executes the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the output of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R in the activation notification process and the reception of the setting value change end notification command. A portion in which the CPU 120 emits light for 40 seconds from the game effect lamp 9, outputs an output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and executes a message image for 40 seconds on the image display device 5 in the activation notification process. As shown in -19, based on the reception of the hot start notification command or cold start notification command, the decorative symbol is displayed as a combination of "1", "2", and "3" as the initial symbol, or the set value. The part where the decorative symbol is displayed as a combination of "4", "5", and "6" as the initial symbol based on the reception of the change end notification command)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize which activated state it is in.

Furthermore, as means 6 of the invention 122SG,
When the set value is changed in the third activation state, the game control means erases the backup information stored in the backup storage means except for specific information (for example, variant 122SG-1). As shown in FIG. 9-23, the RAM clear process is executed based on the change of the set value, and the data after the address F001 excluding the data of the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is cleared. part)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to execute appropriate erasure of backup information in response to a change in a set value.

Furthermore, as means 7 of the invention 122SG,
A game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing game information used by the game control means to control the progress of the game is provided.
The timing for erasing at least a part of the game information stored in the game information storage means differs between the first activated state and the second activated state (for example, as shown in the modified example 122SG-4). When starting the gaming machine 1 with a cold start, the RAM clear processing is executed at the timing before the cold start notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the setting changed. , The part that executes the RAM clear process at the timing after the set value change start notification command is sent to the effect control board 12)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to execute the erasure of the gaming information at an appropriate timing according to the activation state.

The present embodiment also includes the invention 123SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as pachinko gaming machines, for example, there are those described in JP-A-2016-4-2880 and those described in JP-A-2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in JP-A-2016-42880 and JP-A-2010-20092, when the gaming machine is turned on and started (power supply to the gaming machine is started). When), the main board clears the backed up memory regardless of the backed up memory (general startup state), and the setting value of the gaming machine can be changed (setting startup state). If the notification modes are the same, it is not possible to specify whether the gaming machine is in the general activation state or the setting activation state, and there is a problem that it is difficult to detect unauthorized setting changes of the gaming machine. rice field. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the invention 123SG that solves the problem.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, CPU 103) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) by performing a predetermined operation executes a setting change process shown in FIGS. 9-14. The part to do) and
A game control means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) which can control the progress of the game and can execute the control to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means. The part to do) and
A backup storage means (for example, RAM 102 or RAM 122) that can retain the stored contents for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.
A start notification means capable of notifying the start state of the game control means when the power supply to the game machine is started (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the start notification process shown in FIGS. 9-17).
Equipped with
The game control means is based on a general activation state (for example, a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by a hot start) in which the backup storage means is cleared and activated as the activation state, and the setting means. It has a setting activation state (for example, a setting change state) that enables the setting, and has a setting activation state (for example, a setting change state).
The activation notification means performs the notification in different modes in the general activation state and the setting activation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by cold start). , The light emission of the game effect lamp and the sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R are executed, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, the light emission of the game effect lamp, the sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the image The part that executes the display of the message image on the display device 5)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to easily identify whether the activation state is the general activation state or the setting activation state, so that fraud due to the setting can be easily detected. ..

Furthermore, as means 2 of the invention 123SG,
The activation notification means can execute various notifications according to the priority.
The priority of the notification of the setting activation state is higher than the priority of the notification of the general activation state (for example, as shown in the modification 122SG-5, during execution of the notification during the change of the setting value having a high priority, the notification is being executed. The part that prevents RAM clear notification with low priority from being executed)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, since the notification of the setting activation state is prioritized, it is possible to prevent the fraud due to the setting from being undetectable.

Furthermore, as means 3 of the invention 123SG,
The activation notification means notifies the set activation state and the general activation state in different notification periods (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by cold start, the notification period is 60 seconds, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 Describes a gaming machine characterized in that the notification period is 40 seconds when the machine is started in the setting change state), and according to this feature, appropriate notification can be executed in the period according to the activation state. ..

Furthermore, as means 4 of the invention 123SG,
The activation notification means is
It has a first notification means (for example, an image display device 5) and a second notification means (for example, a game effect lamp 9 and speakers 8L, 8R) different from the first notification means.
The setting activation state is notified by the first notification means (for example, a portion for displaying a message image on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 9-20).
The general activation state is notified by the second notification means (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-20, a portion that executes light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R). A gaming machine to be used is described, and according to this feature, since the activation notification is executed by different notification means, it is possible to easily recognize which activation state the player is in.

Furthermore, as means 5 of the invention 123SG,
The game control means is a game control (for example, a game control by a setting common as a setting related to the game progress between the game-enabled state after the set activated state and the game-enabled state after the general activated state. A game characterized in that the CPU 103 does not execute the start winning determination process after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, so that it is possible to execute (a part that restricts the execution of the pre-reading notice effect up to four variable displays). The machine is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience such as recognition that the setting has been changed by executing the game control with different settings.

The present embodiment also includes the invention 124SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-137351. However, in the gaming machines described in JP-A-2016-137351, if the gaming information is unintentionally deleted due to a change in the set value, the store or the player in which the gaming machine is installed may find it. There is a risk of giving a disadvantage. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the invention 124SG that solves the problem.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, CPU 103) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) by performing a predetermined operation executes a setting change process shown in FIGS. 9-14. The part to do) and
A game control means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) which can control the progress of the game and can execute the control to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means. The part to do) and
A game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing game information used by the game control means to control the progress of the game, and
Notification means capable of notifying in advance that the game information stored in the game information storage means will be erased (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the set value change confirmation notification process in the modification 122SG-1). When,
Equipped with
The game control means erases at least a part of the game information stored in the game information storage means when a new set value is set by the setting means (for example, the CPU 103 is a modification 122SG-1). The part that executes the RAM clear processing shown in),
The predetermined operation includes a setting change start operation (for example, an operation of turning on the clear switch), a setting change operation (for example, an operation of turning on the setting changeover switch 122SG052), and a setting change completion operation (for example, turning off the lock switch 122SG051). Operation) and including
The setting means can perform the setting change operation by performing the setting change start operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-23 as a modification 122SG-1, the CPU 103 has a clear switch ON. After the determination (122SGSa054a; Y), the process of 122SGSa054d to 122SGSa056 can be executed), and the setting change completion operation is performed after the possible setting change operation, so that the setting is changed by the setting change operation. A portion in which the set value is set (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-23 as a modification 122SG-1, the CPU 103 determines that the lock switch is OFF (122SGSa057; N) and then executes the processing of the 122SGSa058. ),
The notification means executes the notification when the setting change start operation is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-24 as a modification 122SG-1, the effect control CPU 120 starts the first setting value change. The part that executes the set value change confirmation notification process based on the determination that the notification command has been received (122SGS410; Y))
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gaming information from being unintentionally deleted by changing the set value.

Furthermore, as means 2 of the invention 124SG,
When the setting change completion operation is performed without the setting change operation after the setting change start operation is performed, the game control means stores the game information stored in the game information storage means. It is determined that the lock switch 122SG051 is further turned off after the CPU 103 determines that the setting changeover switch is not operated (122SGSa054d; N) without erasing (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-23 as a modification 122SG-1). If it is determined, based on the fact that the same set value is stored in the address F000 and the address F001 of the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; Y), the set value change process is completed without executing the RAM clear process (122SGSa060). Part to do)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by erasing the gaming information even though the set value is not changed. be able to.

Furthermore, as means 3 of the invention 124SG,
The notification means can notify that the game information is not erased by the game control means when the predetermined operation is completed without performing the setting change completion operation (for example, as a modification 122SG-1). As shown in FIG. 9-25, the message image 122SG005M1 is displayed on the image display device 5 by the effect control CPU 120 executing the set value change confirmation notification process).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, the operator can recognize an operation method for preventing the gaming information from being erased, so that the gaming information is unintentionally described. It is possible to further prevent it from being erased.

Furthermore, as means 4 of the invention 124SG,
The game control means is stored in the game information storage means when the erasing condition is satisfied and a predetermined confirmation operation is performed when the power supply to the game machine is started. After erasing at least a part of the information (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-11, the CPU 103 determines that the clear switch is ON (122SGSa003; Y) in the game control main process, the RAM clear process (122SGSa017) is executed. Part to do),
The notification means also performs the notification even when the deletion condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-26 as a modification 122SG-2, the message image 122SG005M2 is displayed on the image display device 5. part)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gaming information from being unintentionally deleted.

Furthermore, as means 5 of the invention 124SG,
An effect control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling an effect based on control information output from the game control means, and an effect control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120).
A staging control storage means (for example, RAM 122) capable of storing information used by the staging control means, and
A selection means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of selecting whether or not to execute erasing in the effect control storage means, and
Equipped with
When the erasing condition is satisfied when the power supply to the game machine is started and the selection means selects not to execute the erasing in the effect control storage means, the game information storage is performed. Erase conditions when at least a part of the game information stored in the means is erased (for example, a part that clears only RAM 102 as shown in the modification 122SG-3) and power supply to the game machine is started. Is satisfied, and when it is selected by the selection means to execute the erasure in the effect control storage means, at least a part of the game information stored in the game information storage means is erased. At the same time, at least a part of the information stored in the effect control storage means is erased (for example, a portion that clears both the RAM 102 and the RAM 122 as shown in the modified example 122SG-3).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, whether or not to execute the erasing in the game information storage means and the erasing of the staging control storage means when the erasing condition is satisfied. Can be selected.

Although the feature portion 122SG in the embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and there are changes and additions within the range not deviating from the gist of the present invention. Even included in the present invention.

For example, in the feature unit 122SG of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-11, when the clear switch is ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the RAM clear process (122SGSa017) is executed and then the lock switch. Although the setting change process (122SGSa020) is executed when the 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa018; Y) to enable the pachinko gaming machine 1 to set a new setting value, the present invention is limited to this. If the clear switch is ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, it is determined first whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON, and if the lock switch 122SG051 is ON, in the setting change process. The RAM clear process may be executed based on the setting of a new set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In this way, when the RAM clear processing is executed based on the setting of a new setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change processing, as shown in FIG. 9-23 as a modification 122SG-1. In the setting change processing, the CPU 103 first transmits a first setting value change notification command indicating that the CPU 103 has started executing the setting change processing to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa051). Next, the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is specified (122SGSa052), and the specified set value is displayed on the display monitor 122SG029.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON (122SGSa054a), and when the clear switch is OFF (122SGSa054a; N), further determines whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (12SGsa051). 122SGSa054b). When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa054b; Y), the processes of 122SGSa054a and 122SGSa054b are repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the clear switch is ON or the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF. When the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF, the setting value change end notification command is transmitted to the staging control board 12 to end the setting change process (122SGS061).

When the clear switch is ON (122SGSa054a; Y), the CPU 103 issues a second setting value change start notification command indicating that the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by operating the setting changeover switch 122SG052. It is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa054c), and it is determined whether or not the setting changeover switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054d).

When the setting changeover switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054d; Y), the content of the address F001 in the RAM 102 is updated (122SGSa055). Specifically, when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "1", "2", which is a setting value one step more advantageous to the player than the "1", is set as a temporary setting value. When the set value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "2", the set value "3", which is one step more advantageous to the player than the "2", is provisionally set. It is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a set value. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "3", "1" may be stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a temporary set value.

Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (provisional set value) stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa056), and determines whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057). When there is no operation of the setting changeover switch in 122SGSa054 (122SGSa054; N), the process of 122SGSa057 is executed without executing the processes of 122SGSa055 and 122SGSa056.

When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057; Y), the CPU 103 is stored in the address F001 or the process of storing a new temporary setting value in the address F001 of the RAM 102 by repeatedly executing the processes of 122SGSa054d to 122SGsa056. The process of displaying the set value on the display monitor 122SG029 is executed.

Further, when the lock switch is OFF in 122SGSa057 (122SGSa057; N), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the set value (temporary set value) is stored in the address 001 of the RAM 102 (122SGSa057a). When the set value (temporary set value) is not stored in the address 001 of the RAM 102, that is, when the lock switch 122SG051 is turned off without operating the setting changeover switch 122SG052, the setting value change end notification command is produced. It is transmitted to the control board 12 to end the setting change process (122SGS061).

On the other hand, when the set value (temporary set value) is stored in the address 001 of the RAM 102 (122SGSa057a; Y), the set value stored in the address F000 and the set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102. (122SGSa057b), and it is determined whether or not the same set value is stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c). When the same set value is stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; Y), that is, when the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed, the setting value change end notification command is directed and controlled. It is transmitted to the board 12 to end the setting change process (122SGS061).

Further, when different setting values are stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; N), that is, when the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, it is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102. The set value is stored in the address F000, that is, the set value stored in the address F001 is stored as the main set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (122SGSa058).

Then, a setting value designation command corresponding to the set value (the set value of the newly set pachinko gaming machine 1) stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa059), and the RAM is cleared. The process is executed (122SGSa060). The RAM clear process (122SGSa060) executes the same process as the RAM clear process described with reference to FIG. 9-13, and is stored in the data (stored after the address F001) excluding the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102. Data) is cleared. After the RAM clear processing (122SGSa060) is executed, the setting value change end notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 to end the setting change processing (122SGS061).

FIG. 9-24 is a flowchart showing a part of the staging control main process in the modified example 122SG-1. In the effect control main process in the modification 122SG-1, the effect control CPU 120 changes the first set value when it is determined that the cold start notification command is not received (122SGS407; N), as shown in FIG. 9-24. It is determined whether or not the start notification command has been received (122SGS410a). If the first set value change start notification command is not received (122SGS410a; N), the process proceeds to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 9-17), and if the first setting value change start notification command is received (122SGS410a; Y), the process proceeds to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 9-17). , The set value change confirmation notification process is executed (122SGS410b), and by changing the set value in the image display device 5, the game information etc. stored in the RAM 102 is cleared, or if the set value is not changed, the lock is displayed. The instruction to turn off the switch 122SG051 is displayed as the message image 122SG005M1 (see FIG. 9-25 (A)).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second set value change start notification command has been received (122SGS410c). When the second set value change start notification command is not received (122SGS410C; N), it is further determined whether or not the set value change end notification command is received (122SGS410d). When the setting value change end notification command is not received (122SGS410d; N), the processes of 122SGS410b to 122SGS410d are repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the first setting value change start notification command or the setting value change end notification command is received. If the setting value change end notification command is received (122SGS410d; Y), the process proceeds to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 9-17).

Further, when the second set value change start notification command is received (122SGS410c; Y), the effect control CPU 120 executes the set value changing notification process for notifying that the setting value change operation is in progress. (122SGS411), it is determined whether or not the set value change end notification command is received (122SGS411a). When the setting value change end notification command is not received (122SGS411a; N), the processes of 122SG411 and 122SGS411a are repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the setting value change end notification command is received. Then, when the set value change end notification command is received (122SGS411a; Y), it is determined whether or not the set value designation command is received (122SGS411b). If the setting value specification command is not received (122SGS411b; N), the process proceeds to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 9-17), and if the setting value specification command is received (122SGS411b; Y), the received setting value specification command is used. The set value newly set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the set value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102) is specified, and the specified set value is set value information ("1" to "3" according to the set value. The value) is updated and stored in the RAM 122 (122SG413). Then, the process proceeds to 122SGS408 (see FIG. 9-17).

As described above, the CPU 103 executes the setting change process, and the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control main process, so that the pachinko game machine with the clear switch and the lock switch 122SG051 turned on by the clerk of the game hall or the like. When 1 is activated, as shown in FIG. 9-25 (A), the game information and the like stored in the RAM 102 are cleared by changing the set value in the image display device 5, and the set value is changed. If not, the instruction to turn off the lock switch 122SG051 is displayed as the message image 122SG005M1.

When the message image 122SG005M1 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the clerk of the game hall turns off the lock switch 122SG051, as shown in FIG. 9-25 (B), the pachinko gaming machine 1 The decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 as an initial symbol in a combination of "1", "2", and "3" without changing the set value of and without clearing the RAM 102. On the other hand, when the clerk of the game hall turns on the clear switch again while the message image 122SG005M1 is displayed on the image display device 5, the pachinko game machine 1 is as shown in FIG. 9-25 (C). Is in the setting change state, and it is notified that the setting value is being changed by displaying an image on the image display device 5, emitting light from the game effect lamp 9, sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the like.

Then, when the clerk of the game hall turns off the lock switch 122SG051 without setting a new set value in the setting change state, or the clerk of the game hall or the like sets the new set value and is the same as the original set value. When the set value is set and the lock switch 122SG051 is turned off, as shown in FIG. 9-25 (D), the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed and the RAM 102 is cleared. Instead, the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 as an initial symbol in a combination of "1", "2", and "3". Further, when the clerk of the amusement park sets a new set value (changes the set value) and turns off the lock switch 122SG051 in the setting change state, the set value is as shown in FIG. 9-25 (E). The RAM 102 is cleared based on the change, and the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 as a combination of "4", "5", and "6" as the initial symbol.

Further, in the modification 122SG-1, the set value is changed to the image display device 5 by starting the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the clear switch and the lock switch 122SG051 turned on by a clerk of the game hall or the like. Illustrates the mode in which the game information and the like stored in the RAM 102 are cleared and the instruction to turn off the lock switch 122SG051 when the set value is not changed is displayed as the message image 122SG005M1. The image is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 9-26 as a modified example 122SG-2, an image is displayed by activating the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the clear switch turned on by a clerk at the amusement park or the like. If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the device 5 with a cold start to clear the game information stored in the RAM 102, or if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not started with a cold start, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted. The instruction to perform the above may be displayed as the message image 122SG005M2.

By doing so, for example, when a clerk of a game hall or the like accidentally turns on the clear switch when trying to start the pachinko game machine 1 with a hot start, the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start. It is possible to prevent the game information stored in the RAM 102 from being unintentionally cleared.

Further, in the modified example 122SG-1 and the modified example 122SG-2, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state or in the cold start, the message image 122SG005M1 and the message image 122SG005M2 are displayed on the image display device 5. The present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM 102 is cleared by displaying a message on the image display device 5. Whether or not it is confirmed may be performed only when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state or when it is started by the cold start, or both may be performed.

Further, in the modification 122SG-1, the set value is changed to the image display device 5 by starting the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the clear switch and the lock switch 122SG051 turned on by a clerk of the game hall or the like. Illustrates the mode in which the game information and the like stored in the RAM 102 are cleared and the instruction to turn off the lock switch 122SG051 when the set value is not changed is displayed as the message image 122SG005M1. The RAM 102 is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 9-27 as a modification 122SG-3, the RAM 102 is cleared based on the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start and the set value is changed. If this is the case, whether or not to clear the RAM 122 according to the fact that the set value has been changed in the image display device 5 or that the RAM 102 has been cleared, and that the set value has been changed or the RAM 102 has been cleared. The message image 122SG005M3 including the options may be displayed, and the selection of whether or not to clear the RAM 122 may be accepted by operating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A.

When clearing the RAM 122 is selected by operating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, the effect control CPU 120 clears the information other than the set value information in the RAM 122 by executing the RAM clear process (resulting in this). If you do not select to clear RAM 122 by operating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, the RAM 122 will not be cleared (as a result, only the RAM 102 will be cleared).

Further, in the feature unit 122SG in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is started at the same timing (cold start notification command and setting for the effect control board 12) when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a setting change state. An embodiment in which the RAM clear process is executed at the timing before the value change start notification command is transmitted) is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as the modified example 122SG-4, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is executed in the cold start, the RAM clear process is executed at the timing before the cold start notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and the effect control is executed when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state. Timing after sending the setting value change start notification command to the board 12 (more specifically, after sending the setting value change end notification command to the effect control board 12, that is, the setting value change is completed. The timing of clearing the RAM 102 may be different depending on whether the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a cold start state or in a setting change state, such as when the RAM clear process is executed later).

Further, in the feature unit 122SG in the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-17, the RAM 102 and the RAM 122 are always cleared depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the cold start state or in the setting change state. An example is a mode in which a RAM clear notification process is executed in order to notify (execute a RAM clear notification), but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 122SG-5, a pachinko game When the machine 1 is started in the setting change state to notify that the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is being changed (the notification during the setting value change is executed), the RAM clear notification is not executed, etc. When the high priority notification (for example, the setting value changing notification) is executed, the low priority notification (for example, RAM clear notification) may not be executed.

When the priority is set for each notification in this way, the low priority notification may be executed after the high priority notification is executed. In this case, the low-priority notification is executed in a shorter period than when the high-priority notification is not executed, so that the period for executing the notification is prevented from becoming long. You may.

Further, although the feature unit 122SG in the above embodiment does not perform any setting for the movable body 32 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated. At the time, the operation for confirming whether or not the movable body 32 operates normally may be executed in parallel with the above-mentioned RAM clear notification, setting value changing notification, setting value confirmation notification, and various activation notifications. .. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start or a cold start, the start notification is executed for 60 seconds, so that the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 can be executed during the start notification. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the set value is changed in addition to the start notification for 40 seconds. Therefore, the movable body 32 is being changed during the change of these setting values and during the start notification for 40 seconds. Confirmation operation can be executed.

The confirmation operation of the movable body 32 may be executed from the time when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, regardless of the activation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, and the like. The setting value change start notification command, the setting value change end notification command, the setting value confirmation start notification command, the setting value confirmation end notification command, and the like may be executed from the time when the effect control CPU 120 (effect control board 12) receives the command. Further, when the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 is executed from the time when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change start notification command, that is, the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 is executed while the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed. In this case, even if an error in the confirmation operation occurs, the execution of the notification during the change of the set value may be prioritized, and the error notification in the confirmation operation may not be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the above-described embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, by setting a new setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the new setting value is directly reflected in the game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a new set value is set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once restarted (pachinko gaming machine 1). The new set value may be reflected in the game by activating the machine 1 by hot start). When the new setting value is reflected in the game by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this way, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 is performed. After slightly moving the movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position, a confirmation operation that can be performed in a relatively short period of time, such as moving the movable body 32 to the origin position again, is executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 When restarting, as a confirmation operation of the movable body 32, it takes a relatively long period of time such as moving the movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position and then moving the movable body 32 to the origin position again. You may perform the action. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the period required for the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the above-described embodiment, the set value stored in the address F000 is disclosed as specific information that is not cleared from the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this and is cleared from the RAM 102. The specific information that is not performed may include RTC settings, error history, and the like.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the above-described embodiment, an embodiment in which a set value as specific information that is not cleared, a temporary set value as information to be cleared, a game information, and the like are stored in the RAM 102 is exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, for example, two RAMs are provided on the game control microcomputer 100, one RAM stores specific information that cannot be cleared such as a set value, and the other RAM stores a temporary set value and a game. Cleared information such as information may be stored. By doing so, the RAM (temporary setting value, game information, etc.) on the other side is stored according to whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state. It is possible to make a difference whether or not to clear the RAM). Further, an area for storing specific information that is not cleared and an area for storing information that is cleared may be provided in the RAM 102.

Further, when two RAMs are provided on the game control microcomputer 100 as described above, a RAM (Static Randam Access Memory) to which a backup battery is connected is connected to a RAM for storing specific information such as set values that cannot be cleared. On the other hand, by using FeRAM (Ferroelectric Randam Access Memory) as the RAM in which temporary set values and game information are stored, it is possible to reliably clear data that is more important than other data such as set values. It may be possible to memorize it without having to.

Further, in the feature portion 122SG of the above-described embodiment, the embodiment in which the clear switch is mounted on the power supply board is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the clear switch is the main board 11. It may be mounted on. By doing so, it is not necessary to newly attach a clear switch to the existing power supply board, so that the manufacturing cost of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG in the above embodiment, the embodiment in which the display monitor 122SG029 for displaying the set value is mounted on the main board 11 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main board is not limited thereto. A display monitor 122SG029 may be provided in the vicinity of the setting changeover switch 122SG052 in No. 11 to facilitate the operation of changing the set value.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG in the above embodiment, an embodiment in which a display monitor 122SG029 for displaying a set value is mounted on the main board 11 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game is not limited to this. If the machine 1 can calculate the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, and the like, the calculated bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio may be displayed on the display monitor 122SG029.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG in the above-described embodiment, the configuration in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by providing the display monitor 122SG029 and the setting changeover switch 122SG052 on the main board 11 is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed by using a monitor (7-segment monitor) mounted on the payout control board, a reset button, or the like.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG in the above embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the CPU 103 exemplifies a mode in which the setting value change start notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 9-11, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, it is the same as when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the cold start. Since the RAM clear process (122SGSa017) is executed, both the set value change start notification command and the cold start notification command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG in the embodiment, the set value 1 is set to the most advantageous setting value for the player, and the set value 3 is set to the most disadvantageous setting value for the player (the set value 1 is the most disadvantageous to the game field). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value 1 is the most disadvantageous to the player. The set value may be set, and the set value 3 may be set as the most advantageous set value for the player.

In particular, in the feature unit 122SG, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or when there is no backup data (122SGSa042; N), "00H" is set in the address F000, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is a state in which the set value 1 is automatically set, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the most advantageous state for the player. Therefore, some players cause the CPU 103 to execute the RAM clear process (see FIG. 9-13 (A)) after causing an abnormality in the RAM 102, thereby causing the pachinko gaming machine 1 to illegally set the set value 1. It is expected to be set. Therefore, as described above, by setting the set value 1 as the most disadvantageous setting value for the player, the pachinko gaming machine 1 plays a game based on the fact that the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear process when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 or the like. It is possible to prevent the pachinko machine from becoming advantageous to the person, and it is possible to improve the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the above-described embodiment, the lighting period of the game effect lamp 9, the sound and output period output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image are the special control and the specific control executed by the CPU 120 for effect control. The present invention exemplifies a mode in which whether or not an image is displayed on the display device 5 is different (controls related to notification at startup are different), but the present invention is not limited to this, and these special controls and specific controls are used. In addition to the control related to the notification at the time of activation described above, the initial design (see FIG. 9-19), the background image, and the character displayed on the image display device 5 after the pachinko game machine 1 is in a state where the game can be played. Whether or not to perform control related to the production such as different things (the production mode and the production state after the pachinko game machine 1 is in a state where the game can be played) and the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 are executed. It may include control related to the confirmation operation such that the mode of the confirmation operation and the execution period are different. That is, the special control and the specific control in the present invention may be controls in which at least a part of the target controlled by the staging control CPU 120, the control mode of the staging control CPU 120, the control period of the staging control CPU 120, and the like are different. ..

Further, in the feature unit 122SG in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of the gaming machine. For example, by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, the game is played. Is possible to start, and one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to an image display device capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified by each, and the variable display derived to the image display device is completed. It can also be applied to slot machines where prizes can be generated according to the result.

Further, in the feature unit 122SG of the embodiment, a message such as "setting is being changed" is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the determination that the effect control CPU 120 has received the setting value change start notification command. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 notifies that the setting change has been executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main board 11 (CPU 103) notifies these notifications. In this case, a signal that can identify that the main board 11 is changing the setting to a management device such as an external hall management computer, for example, information. The output from the terminal board may be used to notify an external device, and the main board 11 (CPU103) may display or light a display, a lamp, or the like connected to the main board 11. By controlling the state, it may be recognizable from the outside that the setting is being changed. For example, all the indicators, lamps, and the like connected to the main board 11 may be turned on. In order to distinguish between the state where the setting is being changed and the state other than that (the state in which the game is possible), it is preferable to make the display, the lamp, etc. connected to the main board 11 emit light in a mode different from that during the normal game. ..

Further, not only when these settings are being changed, but also when the settings are being confirmed, the main board 11 (CPU 103) outputs a signal to the outside to notify the user, or is connected to the main board 11. By controlling the display and lighting state of the display, lamp, etc., it may be possible to notify from the outside that the setting is being confirmed so that it can be recognized.

In this way, by executing the notification by the main board 11 (CPU 103), for example, even for a model that does not have the image display device 5, for example, a model such as a drum machine, the setting is being changed and the setting is confirmed. You can recognize that it is inside.

When the main board 11 (CPU 103) executes notification, a dedicated lamp, LED, or the like may be provided to notify that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed. The first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display connected to the main board 11 (CPU103) for the purpose of preventing the cost increase due to the provision of these dedicated lamps, LEDs, and the like. The display mode of the device 20 is a special display mode that is not displayed during a normal game (variable display, non-variable display (standby), big hit game, etc.), for example, a blinking display or a special display pattern (special special feature). It may be notified by lighting and displaying in (Fig.).

Further, in the case of providing a dedicated lamp, LED, etc., in order to prevent the player or the like from easily recognizing that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed, for example, these lamps or the like. An LED or the like may be provided inside the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, or the ordinary symbol display device 20.

In addition, in the case of notifying both that the setting is being changed and that the setting is being confirmed, these states are notified (notified to the outside) in the notification mode (same output signal) of 1. Alternatively, by notifying (notifying the outside) each of these states in an individual notification mode (different output signal), it may be possible to identify which state of each state is from the outside.

Further, when it is possible to notify that the main board 11 (CPU 103) is changing the setting or confirming the setting by lighting / blinking a dedicated lamp, LED, or the like, the display control unit on the staging control board 12 Without waiting for the rise of 123 (without waiting for the display of a message such as "setting is being changed" on the image display device 5 to start), the setting is being changed immediately by lighting / blinking the dedicated lamp or LED. It is possible to notify that there is something or that the setting is being confirmed.

(Explanation of the feature unit 141SG in the present embodiment)
Next, the feature portion 141SG of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 10-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 141SG of the present embodiment, and shows the layout of the main members. The left side of the image display device 5 in the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is formed in the left game area 141SG002L where the game ball can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 in the game board 2 is a game. It is formed in the right gaming area 141SG002R where the ball can flow down.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, the variation display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variation display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game are supported. For example, in a decorative symbol display area that is a plurality of variable display units such as three, decorative symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can identify each are variablely displayed. The variable display of this decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game.

As an example, in the display area of the image display device 5, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 141SG005L, 141SG005C, and 141SG005R are arranged. Then, in the special symbol game, one of the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is started. Variation of the decorative symbol (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started in each of the decorative symbol display areas 141SG005L, 141SG005C, 141SG005R of "left", "middle", and "right". After that, when the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variation display result in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol display areas 141SG005L, 141SG005C, 141SG005R of the "left", "middle", and "right" on the image display device 5 , The fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol), which is the result of the variable display of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed.

As described above, in the display area of the image display device 5, the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A or the special figure using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is used. In synchronization with the figure game, a variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified by each is performed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “deriving”). In addition, to derive and display various display symbols such as special symbols and decorative symbols is to stop the identification information such as decorative symbols (also referred to as complete stop display or final stop display) and end the variable display. .. On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation display of the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result, the variable speed of the decorative symbol becomes "0" and the decoration is displayed. The design may be stagnant and displayed, and may be in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction, for example. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not definitively displayed, the player can recognize that the change of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display has not progressed. It becomes. It should be noted that the temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbol completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

The decorative symbols that are variablely displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 141SG005L, 141SG005C, and 141SG005R include, for example, eight types of symbols (alphabetic characters "1" to "8" or Chinese characters. It may be a number, an English character, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and a character image, and the character image may be, for example, a person or an animal, an object other than these, or an object other than these. , A symbol such as a character, or a decorative image showing any other figure). Each of the decorative symbols has a corresponding symbol number. For example, a symbol number of "1" to "8" is attached to each of the alphanumericals indicating "1" to "8". The number of decorative patterns is not limited to eight, and may be any number as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as "big hit" combinations and "missing" combinations can be configured (for example, seven types). 9 types, etc.).

After the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, until the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, each decorative symbol display area 141SG005L, 141SG005C, 141SG005R of "left", "middle", and "right" In, for example, a scroll display is performed in which the symbol numbers flow from top to bottom in order from the smallest to the largest, and when the decorative symbol having the maximum symbol number (for example, "8") is displayed, the process continues. The decorative symbol with the smallest symbol number (for example, "1") is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 141SG005L, 141SG005C, and 141SG005R (for example, the decorative symbol display area 5L on the "left"), scroll display is performed from the one with the larger symbol number to the one with the smaller symbol number, and the symbol is displayed. When the decorative symbol having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative symbol having the largest number may be displayed subsequently.

A first reserved storage display area 141SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 141SG005U are set at two locations on the left and right below the display area of the image display device 5. In the first reserved storage display area 141SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 141SG005U, the reserved storage display for identifiablely displaying the reserved storage number (special figure reserved storage number) of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is performed.

Here, the holding of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is such that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. ) Generates based on the starting prize. That is, the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the decorative symbol is satisfied, but the variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot game state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. It will be done. In this embodiment, the hold memory display generated based on the start winning due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening is set as a round white display, and the game ball passes through the second starting winning opening (entering). The hold memory display generated based on the start winning by entering) is similarly made into a round white display.

In the following description, the first hold storage display area 141SG005D and the second hold storage display area 141SG005U may be referred to as a hold display area, and the number of hold storages is the first hold storage display area 141SG005D and the second hold storage display. It can be recognized by the number of hold storage displays displayed in the area 141SG005U. Further, the display in which the hold storage displays are collected may be referred to as a hold display.

Whether the hold display in the first hold storage display area 141SG005D and the second hold storage display area 141SG005U is generated based on the start prize caused by the game ball passing (entering) the first start prize opening, or the second The display mode (for example, display color and shape) may be different depending on whether the game ball is generated based on the start prize due to the passing (entry) of the game ball through the start prize opening. In this embodiment, "execution" and "implementation" are synonymous.

Further, at the left end of the image display device 5, a small symbol display area 141SG005S including small symbols of "left", "middle", and "right" that fluctuate in conjunction with the variation display of the decorative symbol is also arranged. Since the small symbol in the feature portion 141SG of the present embodiment is smaller than the decorative symbol and is displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5, it is a symbol having lower visibility and decorativeness than the decorative symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the small symbol may be a symbol having lower visibility and decorativeness than the decorative symbol.

The left game area 141SG002L is a game area in which a (left-handed) game ball launched relatively weakly by the operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 141SG002R is a left game area 141SG002L by the operation of the ball striking operation handle 30. This is a game area in which a game ball launched (right-handed) stronger than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 141SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

Further, two general winning openings 141SG010A and 141SG010B are arranged in the left gaming area 141SG002L, and the passing gate 141SG041 and the variable winning ball are arranged in the right gaming area 141SG002R from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right gaming area 141SG002R. The device 141SG006B, the general winning opening 141SG010C, and the special variable winning ball device 141SG007 are arranged in order. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 141SG002L can win a prize in the first starting winning opening formed by the general winning openings 141SG010A and 141SG010B and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 141SG002R can be won. The second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 141SG006B, the large winning opening formed by the 141SG010C and the special variable winning ball device 141SG007 can be won, and the passage gate 141SG041 can be passed through. That is, the game ball flowing down the right game area 141SG002R can first pass through the passing gate 141SG041, and then the second starting winning opening, the general winning opening 141SG010C, and the large winning opening can be won in this order.

As shown in FIG. 10-2, the switch circuit 110 in the present embodiment includes a gate switch 21 for detecting a game ball passing through the passing gate 141SG041 and a game ball winning a prize in the first starting winning opening. The first start port switch 22A for detecting, the second start port switch 22B for detecting the game ball winning in the second start winning opening, and the second for detecting the game ball winning in the big winning opening. 1 count switch 141SG023A, 2nd count switch 141SG023B for detecting game balls winning in general winning opening 141SG010A, 3rd count switch 141SG023C for detecting game balls winning in general winning opening 141SG010B, general winning opening 141SG010D A fourth count switch 141SG023D for detecting a winning game ball is connected.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 141SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 141SG006B, the general winning opening 141SG010C, and the special variable winning ball device 141SG007. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 141SG002L cannot win the second start winning opening, the general winning opening 141SG010C, and the large winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 141SG002R cannot win the first starting prize. It is not possible to win a prize in the mouth, the general winning opening 141SG010A and the general winning opening 141SG010B.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the player launches the game ball toward the right game area 141SG002R during the big hit game or the time saving state, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 141SG002R wins the second start. It is possible to win a prize in the mouth, the general winning opening 141SG010C, and the large winning opening.

Further, a plurality of obstacle nails 141SGK2 and 141SGK3 are arranged around the normal drawing start winning opening 141SG042 in the right game area 141SG002R. That is, in the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to the general winning opening 141SG010C during the big hit game can be adjusted by these obstacle nails 141SGK2 and 141SGK3.

FIG. 10-2 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the staging control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 10-2 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-2 (A), the command 8001H is a first variation start command for designating the variation start in the special figure game using the first special diagram in the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the variation start in the special symbol game using the second special diagram in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variablely displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 141SG005L, 141SG005C, 141SG005R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (variation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the fluctuation pattern designation command, different EXT data are set according to the fluctuation pattern to be designated and the like.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is "miss" or "big hit" and the variable display result are displayed. Different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is set in the case of "big hit".

In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command indicating a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "non-probable variable big hit". The command 8C04H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 141SG005L, 141SG005C, and 141SG005R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is used as the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time reduction control nor the probability change control is performed, and the command 9501H is executed by the time reduction control. On the other hand, it is a second game state specification command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. Further, the command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (high accuracy high base state, probability variation state with time reduction) in which both time reduction control and probability variation control are performed.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit game or a small hit game. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that it is a period during which the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game or the small hit.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result specification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result designation command. .. In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data correspond to the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "16") in the normal open big hit state and the high-speed open big hit state, for example. Is set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 141SG006B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The first hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12. The second hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C3XXH is a prize ball number notification command for making it possible to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of a game ball in each winning opening. The command C401H is a special zone notification command for notifying the start of the special zone described later, and the command C402H is a special zone notification command for notifying the end of the special zone described later.

FIG. 10-3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 10-3, in the feature unit 141SG of the present embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern determination are used. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR3 and the random value MR4 for determining the display result of the normal map are controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also referred to as game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown) of the RAM 102, and updates various numerical data by software, whereby the random number values MR1 to Numerical data indicating a part of MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a “big hit” to the big hit gaming state, for example. It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is used to determine the jackpot type to be one of "probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", and "non-probability variation jackpot" when the variable display result is "big hit". It is a random value used, and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to "1" to ". It takes a value in the range of 997.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per normal figure" or "missing normal figure". It is a random value to be obtained, and takes a value in the range of "1" to "997", for example.

FIG. 10-4 shows a variation pattern in the feature portion 141SG of the present embodiment. In the feature unit 141SG of the present embodiment, it is a period from the big hit game of the probabilistic big hit A to the execution of 32 special figure games (32 variable display) in the high probability high base state, and the variable display result. If the jackpot type is a big hit, the percentage of the jackpot A is higher than in the non-special zone. Multiple variations depending on whether the display mode is "non-reach" or "reach", or when the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit". The pattern is prepared in advance. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern") and varies. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “loss”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "big hit" is called a jackpot fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and reach fluctuation pattern in the non-special zone include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. There is. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, a plurality of normal reach α, normal reach β, ... The normal reach fluctuation pattern of may be provided. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

The variation pattern in the present embodiment also includes a variation pattern (PE1-1) of a special hit corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "small hit".

As shown in FIG. 10-4, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the normal reach reach effect is executed in the non-special zone is set shorter than the super reach fluctuation patterns super reach α and super reach β. Has been done. Further, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed is the one. However, the special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

In the feature unit 141SG of the present embodiment, as described above, in the non-special zone, the expectation of a big hit that the variable display result becomes "big hit" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach becomes high. Therefore, in the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

Next, regarding the fluctuation pattern in the special zone, when the fluctuation display result is "miss" (PA1-4) and when the fluctuation display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability change jackpot A" (PC1-). The special figure fluctuation time is set to be the same in 1) (both are 3 seconds). That is, when the probability variation jackpot A occurs in the special zone (when the probability variation jackpot A is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot A" in the 32 fluctuation display after the end of the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot), the probability variation jackpot A occurs at 3 second intervals. When the variation display is repeatedly executed, the decorative design is derived and displayed in a combination indicating "probability variation jackpot A" in a short time (3 seconds from the start of the variation) without executing the reach effect or the like on the image display device 5. To.

Further, regarding the fluctuation patterns in the special zone, there are a plurality of fluctuation patterns (shown in FIG. 10-5) when the fluctuation display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot B" or "non-probability variation jackpot". In the example, 32 fluctuation patterns from PD1-1 to PD1-32) are provided.

The fluctuation patterns PD1-N (N is an integer of 1 to 32) for "probability change jackpot B" and "non-probability change jackpot" in these special zones re-change the temporary stop of the decorative symbol at intervals of 3 seconds from the start of fluctuation, respectively. This is a variation pattern for deriving and displaying a decorative symbol in a combination indicating "probability variation jackpot B" or "non-probability variation jackpot" after executing the pseudo-ream effect N times.

In the feature unit 141SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are used, for example, a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, and the like. Instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type after determining first, only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided to determine these variations. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value for determining the pattern type, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 10-5 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the feature unit 141SG of the present embodiment, the special figure display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure is used as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the first special figure and the second special figure may use individual special figure display result determination tables.

The special figure display result determination table can be used as a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It is a table to be played.

In the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 10-5, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing".

In the special figure display result judgment table, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment determines whether or not to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state. It is the judgment data assigned to the result. In the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 10-5, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), more judgment values are obtained than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probabilistic state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state is higher than the probability determined (about 1/300 in this embodiment) (about 1/30 in this embodiment). ). That is, in the special figure display result determination table, it is determined that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability is high.

In the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 10-5, the number of determination values assigned to the "small hit" is the same regardless of whether or not the gaming state is a probable change state. That is, in the feature unit 141SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the variation display result becomes a "big hit" is a probability change state (high probability state) than when the game state is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state). However, the probability that the variable display result will be a "small hit" is higher than when the game state is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) and a probability change state (high probability state). It is set to be the same as in the case of.

FIG. 10-6 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in the feature unit 141SG of the present embodiment determines the jackpot type based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot gaming state with the special figure display result as "big hit". A table that is referenced to determine one of several types. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variation is displayed (variable) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second special symbol). The numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot", "probability variation jackpot A", or "probability variation jackpot" depending on whether the game is a special figure game by the symbol display device 4B. It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "B" and "non-probability variable jackpot".

Here, the jackpot type in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 10-6 (B). In this embodiment, high accuracy control and time saving control are executed as the jackpot type after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Probability change jackpot A and probability variation jackpot B that shift to the high accuracy high base state, and non-probability change jackpot that shifts to the low accuracy high base state by executing only the time saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state are set. ..

The jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 141SG007 is repeatedly executed 16 times (so-called 16 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 141SG007 to the first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the jackpot gaming state by the "probability variation jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 141SG007 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 141SG007 to the first state advantageous to the player. .. In addition, the big hit game state by "non-probability change big hit" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 141SG007 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 141SG007 to the first state which is advantageous for the player. .. Therefore, the "probability change jackpot A" may be referred to as a 16-round (16R) probability variation jackpot, and the "probability variation jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) probability variation jackpot. It should be noted that the probability variation control and the time saving control are not executed even during the big hit game of any of the big hit types.

Further, although not particularly shown, the small hit game state in the present embodiment changes the special variable winning ball device 141SG007 to the first state advantageous to the player twice, and makes the special variable winning ball device 141SG007 extremely short. Open for a period (eg, 0.1 seconds). After the small hit game is completed, the game state immediately before the small hit game is inherited.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probabilistic jackpot A and the probabilistic jackpot B are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the jackpot that occurs again is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs continuously. In particular, in the feature unit 141SG of the present embodiment, after the jackpot game of the probabilistic jackpot A is completed, until 32 special figure games (32 variable displays) are executed, or the 32 special figures. It may be controlled to the above-mentioned special zone until the variable display result becomes a big hit during the game, and may be controlled to the big hit game of the probabilistic big hit A through the variable display for 3 seconds in the special zone.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by "non-probability change big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times. It ends when it becomes a big hit game state before it is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-6 (A), "probability variation jackpot A" and "probability variation jackpot B" are used depending on whether the fluctuation special map is the first special map or the second special map. , And the assignment of the judgment value to the jackpot type of "non-probability variable jackpot" is different. That is, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the determination value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "81" to "100") is the "probability change jackpot B" in which the number of rounds is smaller than that of the "probability change jackpot A". When the variable special figure is the second special figure, the number of judgment values smaller than that when the variable special figure is the first special figure is the big hit of "probability variable big hit B". Assigned to a type. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. In the case of Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probability variable jackpot B" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, the jackpot type is set to "probability change jackpot B", and the ratio determined to control to the normal open jackpot state with a smaller number of rounds than "probability variation jackpot A" is small, so that it can be obtained. It is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of big hit games with few prize balls and prevent the game from being deteriorated.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-6 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is determined by whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. Since they are the same regardless of whether they are present or not, the probability of becoming a non-probable big hit and the probability of becoming a probable big hit are the same regardless of whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. It is said that.

Therefore, as described above, the assignment of the judgment value to the "probability change jackpot B" differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, and the "probability change jackpot A" is used. The assignment of the judgment value to "" also differs depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, and for "probability variable jackpot A" with a large number of rounds, the variable special figure is the second special figure. It is set so that the case of is easier to determine than the case of the first special figure.

When the variable special figure is the second special figure, the determination value may not be assigned to the big hit type of "probability variable big hit B". By doing so, when the variable special map is the second special map, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probability variable jackpot B", which has a smaller number of lands than "probable variable jackpot A". It is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of the big hit game of "Probability change big hit B", which has less prize balls than the big hit game of "Probability change big hit A", and prevent the game interest from deteriorating.

Further, in the feature unit 141SG of the present embodiment, an example is exemplified in which the jackpot type is determined by referring to different table data depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is determined by referring to the table data common to the case where the variable special figure is the first special figure and the case where the variable special figure is the second special figure. You may do so.

The RAM 102 in the feature unit 141SG of the present embodiment is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. ing. The game control data holding area includes a first special figure holding storage unit, a second special drawing holding storage unit, a normal drawing holding storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter. It has a setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

In the first special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but the special drawing has not been started yet. The reserved data of the game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and satisfies the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are reserved data. , The storage number is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 141SG006B, and a starting winning (second starting winning) is generated, but the special drawing has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and satisfies the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are reserved data. , Store until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start opening data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal map hold storage unit contains hold information of the normal map game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20, even though the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 141SG041 is detected by the gate switch 21, and the normal map start. Although the game ball winning in the winning opening 141SG042 is detected by the normal drawing start port switch 141SG024, the holding information of the normal drawing game that has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 is stored. For example, the normal figure hold storage unit associates with the hold number in the order in which the game ball passes through (wins) the passage gate 141SG041 and the normal figure start winning opening 141SG042, and the random number circuit 104 etc. is generated by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the normal map display result extracted from the data is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can update the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

Random numbers that are not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, and are periodically executed according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated targetly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 141SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 10-7 is a flowchart showing an example of the game control timer interrupt processing in the feature unit 141SG of the present embodiment. In the game control timer interrupt process, the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process (141SGS22a) for paying out the prize ball after executing the switch process (S21) and the main side error process (S22). In the prize ball processing, the CPU 103 uses the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the first count switch 141SG023A, the second count switch 141SG023B, the third count switch 141SG023C, and the fourth count switch 141SG023D in the switch processing. Of these, the prize balls are paid out according to the switch that received the detection signal, and the transmission setting of the prize ball number notification command according to the number of paid out prize balls is set. After that, the above-mentioned information output process (S23), game random number update process (S24), special symbol process process (S25), normal symbol process process (S26), and command control process (S27) may be executed.

FIG. 10-8 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first refers to the value set in the special zone counter described later, and determines whether or not it is in the special zone (141SGS161). If it is not in the special zone (141SGS161; N), the process proceeds to 13SGS168, and if it is in the special zone (141SGS1611: Y), it is further determined whether or not the jackpot flag is set (141SGS162). If the jackpot flag is not set (141SGS162; N), the process proceeds to 141SGS166, and if the jackpot flag is set (141SGS162; Y), it is determined whether or not the jackpot type of the jackpot is probabilistic jackpot A. (141SGS163).

When the jackpot type of the jackpot is the probability variation jackpot A (141SGS163; Y), the variation pattern determination table for the probability variation jackpot A in the special zone is selected and the process proceeds to 141SGS180 (141SGS164), and the jackpot type of the jackpot is the probability variation jackpot B. Alternatively, in the case of a non-probability change jackpot (141SGS163; N), the special zone medium probability variation jackpot B / non-probability variation jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the value of the special zone counter is selected and the process proceeds to 141SGS180 (141SGS165).

Further, when the big hit flag is not set in 141SGS162 (141SGS162; N), it is further determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (141SGS166). If the small hit flag is not set (141SGS166; N), the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss in the special zone is selected and the process proceeds to 141SGS180 (141SGS167). If the small hit flag is set, the process proceeds to 141SGS171. ..

On the other hand, when the 141SGS161 is not in the special zone, that is, when "0" is set in the special zone counter (141SGS161; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is set (141SGS168). When the jackpot flag is set (141SGS168; Y), the variation pattern determination table for medium jackpot in the non-special zone is selected and the process proceeds to 141SGS180 (141SGS169), and when the jackpot flag is not set (141SGS168; N). , It is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (141SGS170). When the small hit flag is set (141SGS170; Y), the process proceeds to 141SGS171. Then, in 141SGS171, the variation pattern determination table for small hits is selected and the process proceeds to 141SGS180.

Further, when the small hit flag is not set in 141SGS170 (141SGS170; N), it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set (141SGS172). When the time saving flag is set (141SGS172; Y), the loss pattern determination table D described later is selected and the process proceeds to 141SGS180 (141SGS173). When the time saving flag is not set (141SGS172; N), the time saving flag is not set. It is determined whether or not the total number of pending storages is 2 or more (141SGS174). When the total number of reserved storages is 1 or less (141SGS174; N), the loss variation pattern determination table A described later is selected and the process proceeds to 141SGS180 (141SGS175), and when the total number of reserved storages is 2 or more (141SGS175). 141SGS174; Y) further determines whether or not the total reserved storage number is 5 or more (141SGS176).

When the total number of reserved storages is 4 or less (141SGS176; N), the loss variation pattern determination table B described later is selected and the process proceeds to 141SGS180 (141SGS177), and when the total number of reserved storages is 5 or more (141SGS177). 141SGS176; Y) selects the loss pattern determination table C, which will be described later, and proceeds to 141SGS180.

Then, in the 141SGS180, for example, by referring to the selected variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination stored in the variation random number buffer or the like, a plurality of types of variation patterns can be obtained. It is decided to be either (S170).

In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss in the non-special zone (PA2-1), and the super in the non-special zone. A predetermined disturbance within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern of the reach α loss (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss in the non-special zone (PA2-3). A numerical value is assigned as a judgment value. Further, in the variation pattern determination table B for loss, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss (PA1-2) corresponding to the total number of reserved storages of 2 to 4 and the variation pattern of normal reach loss in the non-special zone (PA2). -1), fluctuation pattern for super reach α loss in the non-special zone (PA2-2), fluctuation pattern for super reach β loss in the non-special zone (PA2-3) A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in the range that the numerical value MR3 can take. Further, in the variation pattern determination table C for loss, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss (PA1-3) corresponding to the total number of reserved storages of 5 to 8 and the variation pattern of normal reach loss in the non-special zone (PA2). -1), fluctuation pattern for super reach α loss in the non-special zone (PA2-2), fluctuation pattern for super reach β loss in the non-special zone (PA2-3) A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in the range that the numerical value MR3 can take. Further, in the variation pattern determination table D for loss, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the time reduction control (during the high base including the special zone) (PA1-4), and the variation of the normal reach loss in the non-special zone. Fluctuation pattern determination for pattern (PA2-1), fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss in non-special zone (PA2-2), fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss in non-special zone (PA2-3) A predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value in the range that the MR3 can take.

As shown in FIG. 10-4, the variation time of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and further, the variation pattern (PA1). The fluctuation time of the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) is shorter than that of -2). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. Occasionally, by winning a start, it becomes difficult for a useless start prize that is not stored on hold to occur, and when the number of stored memories decreases, the fluctuation time is long and the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening ( By determining PA1-1), it becomes possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the variable display is not executed because the variable display time becomes long.

Further, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for medium jackpots in the non-special zone, the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot in the non-special zone (PB1-1) and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot in the non-special zone (PB1-2). , A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot in the non-special zone.

Further, in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, all random value values within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can be assigned to the variation pattern PE1-1 for special hits (small hits) are assigned as determination values. Has been done.

Further, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for the jackpot A in the special zone, all the disturbances in the range that the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination can take for the fluctuation pattern (PC1-1) of the jackpot in the special zone. A numerical value is assigned as a judgment value. Further, in the variation pattern determination table for loss in the special zone, the variation pattern determination disorder for the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-4) corresponding to the time reduction control (during the high base including the special zone). All random values in the range that the numerical MR3 can take are assigned as determination values.

Then, in the variation pattern determination table for the probability variation jackpot B / non-probability variation jackpot in each special zone, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the plurality of variation patterns (PD1-1 to PD1-32) for executing the pseudo-continuous effect are Of these, all random value values within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can be assigned to 1 variation pattern corresponding to the number of fluctuations in the special zone (value of the special zone counter) are assigned as determination values. There is.

That is, when the value of the special zone counter is "32" (the first fluctuation in the special zone), the pseudo-continuous effect is executed 32 times in the fluctuation pattern determination table for the probability variation jackpot B / non-probability variation jackpot in the special zone. When all random value values in the range that the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take are assigned as judgment values to the fluctuation pattern (PD1-32) of the jackpot, and the value of the special zone counter is "31". (Second variation in the special zone) In the special zone medium probability variation jackpot B / non-probability variation jackpot variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern (PD1-31) of the jackpot that executes the pseudo-continuous effect 31 times Random value for pattern judgment All random values in the range that MR3 can take are assigned as judgment values, and when the value of the special zone counter is "30" (the third change in the special zone), the special zone In the variation pattern determination table for medium probability variation jackpot B / non-probability variation jackpot, the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination is within the range that can be taken for the variation pattern (PD1-30) of the jackpot that executes the pseudo-continuous effect 30 times. All random numbers are assigned as judgment values ... When the value of the special zone counter is "1" (the 32nd change in the special zone), the special zone medium probability change jackpot B / non-probability change jackpot fluctuation pattern In the determination table, all random value values within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can be assigned to the variation pattern (PD1-1) of the jackpot that executes the pseudo-continuous effect once is assigned as the determination value. There is.

Therefore, when the fluctuation display result is a big hit and the big hit type is a probabilistic big hit B or a non-probable variable big hit in the first fluctuation display in the special zone, the image display device 5 executes a pseudo-continuous effect 32 times. Later, if the decorative pattern is derived and displayed in a combination indicating probabilistic jackpot B or non-probable variable jackpot, and the variable display result is a jackpot and the jackpot type is probabilistic jackpot B or non-probable variable jackpot in the second variation display in the special zone, After 31 pseudo-ream effects are executed on the image display device 5, the decorative pattern is derived and displayed in a combination indicating the probability variation jackpot B and the non-probability variation jackpot, and the variation display result is the jackpot in the third variation display in the special zone. In addition, when the jackpot type is probabilistic jackpot B or non-probable variable jackpot, the decorative pattern is derived and displayed in a combination indicating probabilistic jackpot B or non-probable variable jackpot after 30 pseudo-continuous effects are executed on the image display device 5. ... When the fluctuation display result is a big hit and the big hit type is a probabilistic big hit B or a non-probable variable big hit in the 32nd fluctuation display in the special zone, one pseudo continuous effect is executed on the image display device 5. Later, the decorative design is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a probable change jackpot B or a non-probability change jackpot.

As described above, in the feature unit 141SG of the present embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern is determined in the fluctuation display in the low probability and low base state of the game state, the fluctuation pattern determination table for medium and large hits in the non-special zone, the small hit The variation pattern is determined by selecting any of the variation pattern determination table for loss, the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the variation pattern determination table B for loss, and the variation pattern determination table C for loss.

In addition, in the high probability high base state after the jackpot game of probability variation jackpot A is completed, when the fluctuation pattern is determined in the fluctuation display (in the special zone) of the first to 32nd times after the jackpot game is completed, the probability variation jackpot in the special zone is determined. Select the fluctuation pattern judgment table for A, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for small hits, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for small hits, and the fluctuation pattern judgment table for loss in the special zone. When the fluctuation pattern is determined and the fluctuation pattern is determined in the fluctuation display (in the non-special zone) after the 33rd time after the end of the big hit game, the fluctuation pattern determination table for the medium big hit in the non-special zone and the fluctuation pattern for the small hit The variation pattern is determined by selecting either the determination table or the variation pattern determination table D for loss.

In addition, when determining the fluctuation pattern in the high probability high base state after the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot B or the low probability high base state after the jackpot game of the non-probability jackpot B, the fluctuation pattern determination table for the non-special zone medium jackpot , The variation pattern determination table for small hits, or the variation pattern determination table D for loss is selected to determine the variation pattern.

That is, in the high base state in the feature unit 141SG4 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern determination table that can be selected to determine the fluctuation pattern according to the jackpot type of the jackpot game that triggered the high base state is available. May be different.

In the first to 32nd fluctuation display (during the special zone) after the end of the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A in the feature unit 141SG4 of the present embodiment, the value of the special zone counter is set as shown in the process of 141SGS164. The embodiment in which the fluctuation pattern determination table is switched according to the example is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of the special zone counter, a counter for counting the number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game is provided to make a probability change. In the processing of 141SGS164 after the jackpot game of jackpot A is completed, the fluctuation pattern determination table may be switched according to the value of the counter.

In the feature unit 141SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a big hit and the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot B or a non-probable variable jackpot in the variation display in the special zone, the variation in the special zone in the variation display. An example is an example in which a pseudo-continuous effect of a different number of times is executed according to the number of times of display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and changes in a variable display within a predetermined range in a special zone. When the display result is a big hit and the big hit type is a probabilistic big hit B or a non-probable variable big hit, a specific number of pseudo-continuous effects are always executed in the variable display (for example, the variable display is performed in the first variable display in the special zone). If the result is a big hit and the big hit type is a probable big hit B or a non-probable variable big hit, 32 pseudo-continuous effects are executed in the variable display, and the variable display result is displayed in the 2nd to 11th variable display in the special zone. If the jackpot and jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot B or a non-probability variable jackpot, 31 pseudo-continuous effects are executed, and the variable display result is a jackpot and the jackpot type is probable in the 12th to 21st variation display in the special zone. In the case of a big hit B or a non-probability big hit, the pseudo-continuous production may be executed 20 times, etc.), and the data capacity for the pseudo-continuous production stored in the RAM 122 may be suppressed.

After returning to FIG. 10-8 and determining the fluctuation pattern with the 141SGS180, the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special figure game according to the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value. A setting is made to start the variation of the special symbol so as to start any of the special symbol games using the second special symbol in the special symbol display device 4B (141SGS181). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is made.

Following the processing of 141SGS181, settings for transmitting various commands used at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol are set (141SGS182). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a first variation start command, a variation pattern specification command, and a variation display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially send the designated command and the first hold storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address (start address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is sent to the game control buffer setting unit. Stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the provided send command buffer. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a second variation start command, a variation pattern specification command, and a variation display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the specified command and the second hold storage count notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Store in the buffer area.

After the processing of 141SGS182 is executed, the special symbol variation time, which is the variation display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the variation pattern, is set (141SGS183). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the definite special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is derived and displayed. Is. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation processing (141SGS184), and then the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

FIG. 10-10 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S113 of FIG. 5 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation processing of S113 to end the variation of the special symbol, and stops the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. Control is performed to derive and display a symbol (141SGS201). When the variation special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is terminated, and the variation special symbol designation buffer value is changed. When it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is terminated. In addition, control is performed to transmit a symbol determination command to the staging control board 12 (141SGS202). Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is set (141SGS203), and if the jackpot flag is not set (141SGS203; N), the process proceeds to 141SGS211.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is set (141SGS203; Y), the CPU 103 clears the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag (141SGS204) if the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are set, and the effect control board 12 is set. , To send one of the hit start 1 designated command (probability variable jackpot A), hit start 2 designated command (probable variable jackpot B), and hit start 3 designated command (non-probable variable jackpot) according to the stored jackpot type. Is set (141SGS205).

Further, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting a game state designation command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 12 (141SGS206).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the jackpot, for example, in the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot display time timer (141SGS207). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, 16 times in the case of the probability variation jackpot A and 5 times in the case of the probability variation jackpot B or the non-probability variation jackpot) is set in the large winning opening opening number counter (141SGS208). Then, after setting to output a symbol confirmation signal indicating that the variation display of the special symbol has stopped toward the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (141SGS209), the value of the special symbol process flag is processed before opening the jackpot. It is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to (S114), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated (141SGS210).

On the other hand, in 141SGS2111, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is "0". When the value of the time reduction counter is "0" (141SGS211; Y), the process proceeds to 141SGS216.

On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter is not "0" (141SGS211; N), that is, in the high base state where the time reduction remains, the value of the time reduction counter is decremented by -1 (141SGS212). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is "0" (141SGS213), and if it is not "0" (141SGS213; N), the process proceeds to 141SGS216, and the value of the time reduction counter is "0". In the case of (141SGS213; Y), after clearing the time saving flag (141SGS214) in order to end the time saving control, a gaming state (specifically, low probability) corresponding to the set state of the probability change flag or the time saving flag is set. After setting the transmission of the game state designation command corresponding to (low base) (141SGS215), the process proceeds to 141SGS216.

In 141SGS216, it is determined whether or not the value of the special zone counter is "0". When the value of the special zone counter is any one of 1 to 32 (141SGS216; N), the value of the special zone counter is decremented by -1 (141SGS217). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special zone counter after subtraction is "0" (141SGS218), and when the value of the special zone counter after subtraction is "0" (141SGS218; Y), the special zone After setting the transmission of the end notification command, the process proceeds to 141SGS220 (141SGS219). If the value of the special zone counter after subtraction is not "0" (141SGS218; N), the process proceeds to 141SGS220 without executing 141SGS219.

Then, in 141SGS220, the CPU 103 sets to output a symbol confirmation signal indicating that the variation display of the special symbol has stopped toward the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (141SGS220), and then proceeds to 141SGS22. When the value of the special zone counter is "0" in 141SGS216 (141SGS216; Y), a symbol confirmation signal indicating that the variation display of the special symbol has stopped is output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. After making the setting of (141SGS220), the process proceeds to 141SGS22.

In 141SGS222, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag is set (141SGS222). When the small hit flag is set (141SGS222; Y), the setting for transmitting the hit start 4 designated command (small hit) is made (141SGS223). Then, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the small hit by, for example, the image display device 5) is set in the small hit display time timer (141SGS224). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, twice) is set in the large winning opening opening number counter (141SGS225). The value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "8", which is a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (S118), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated (141SGS226).

When the small hit flag is not set in 141SGS222 (141SGS22; N), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is the value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S110), and the special symbol is stopped. The process is terminated (141SGS228).

FIG. 10-11 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 5 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is operating, that is, the timer is being counted (141SGS231). When the jackpot end display timer is not operating (141SGS231; N), the jackpot end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time for displaying the jackpot end on the image display device 5 (big hit end display time). Set (141SGS232) and end the jackpot end process.

On the other hand, when the big hit end display timer is operating (141SGS231; Y), the value of the big hit end display timer is subtracted by 1 (141SGS233). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (141SGS234). If it has not elapsed (141SGS234; N), the jackpot end process is terminated.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (141SGS234; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B (141SGS235).

When the jackpot type is probability variation jackpot A or probability variation jackpot B (141SGS235; Y), the probability variation flag is set (141SGS238), the time reduction flag is set (141SGS239), and the time reduction counter is set to "0" (. 141SGS240). Further, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot A (141SGS241). When the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot B (141SGS241; N), the process proceeds to 141SGS244, and when the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot A (141SGS241; Y), "32" is set in the special zone counter and (141SGS242). , Set the transmission of the special zone start notification command and proceed to 141SGS244 (133SGS243).

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is non-probability variable jackpot in 141SGS235 (141SGS235; Y; N), the time saving flag is set and "100" is set in the time saving number counter, and then the process proceeds to 141SGS244 (141SGS236, 141SGS237).

Then, the 141SGS244 clears the jackpot flag and sets the transmission of the jackpot end designation command according to the jackpot type (141SGS245). Then, after setting the transmission of the game state specification command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the game state based on the set probability change flag and the time saving flag (141SGS246), the value of the special figure process flag is processed in the special symbol normal process. The jackpot end process is terminated by updating to "0", which is a value corresponding to (141SGS247).

Next, the operation of the staging control board 12 will be described. FIG. 10-12 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S75 of FIG. 6 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 10-12, the effect control CPU 120 first receives from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by confirming the stored contents of the effect control command reception buffer. Determine if there is a command (141SGS251). At this time, if there is no received command (141SGS251; N), the command analysis process ends.

If there is a receive command in 141SGS251 (141SGS151; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the receive command, it is determined whether or not the receive command is the first start opening winning designation command (141SGS252). ). Then, when it is the first start opening winning designation command (141SGS252; Y), the waiting time for notifying the first reserved storage number is set (141SGS253). For example, in the processing of 141SGS253, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first hold storage number notification command is set to the command reception control provided in the effect control timer setting unit provided in the RAM 122 or the like. It may be set in the timer.

When the reception command in 141SGS252 is not the first start opening winning designation command (141SGS252; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the second start opening winning designation command (141SGS254). Then, when it is the second start opening winning designation command (141SGS254; Y), the waiting time for notifying the second reserved storage number is set (141SGS255). For example, in the process of 141SGS255, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second hold storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer provided in the RAM 122 or the like.

When the reception command in 141SGS254 is not the second start opening winning designation command (141SGS254; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the first hold storage number notification command (141SGS256). Then, when it is the first hold storage number notification command (141SGS256; Y), for example, by initializing the timekeeping operation by the command reception control timer provided in the RAM 122 or the like, the first hold storage number notification waiting time is set. Clear (141SGS257).

When the reception command in 141SGS256 is not the first hold storage number notification command (141SGS256; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the second hold storage number notification command (141SGS258). Then, when the second hold storage number notification command is used (141SGS258; Y), the second hold storage number notification waiting time is cleared (141SGS259), for example, by initializing the timekeeping operation by the command reception control timer.

Then, after executing any of the processes of 141SGS253, 141SGS255, 141SGS257, and 141SGS259, the received command is stored in the start winning command buffer provided in the RAM 122 or the like, and the process proceeds to 141SGS251.

On the other hand, when the reception command in 141SGS258 is not the second hold storage number notification command (141SGS258; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the special zone start notification command (141SGS260). When the reception command is a special zone start notification command (141SGS260; Y), the special zone middle flag indicating that the user is in the special zone is set, and the first hold storage display area displayed on the image display device 5 is set. The 141SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 141SG005U are hidden (141SGS261, 141SGS262), and the process proceeds to 141SGS251.

When the reception command is not the special zone start notification command (141SGS260; N) in 141SGS260, it is determined whether or not the reception command is the special zone end notification command (141SGS264). When the reception command is a special zone end notification command (141SGS264; Y), the special zone end flag is set (141SGS265, 141SGS267) to clear the special zone middle flag and set the special zone end flag indicating that the special zone has ended (141SGS265, 141SGS267). Further, the display of the first reserved storage display area 141SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 141SG005U in the image display device 5 is started, and the process proceeds to 141SGS251 (141SGS268).

If the reception command in 141SGS264 is not the special zone end command (141SGS264; N), the setting according to the reception command is made and the process proceeds to 141SGS251 (141SGS271).

FIG. 10-13 is a flowchart showing a part of the staging control process process (S75) in the staging control main process. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 updates the hold storage display displayed in the first hold storage display area 141SG005D and the second hold storage display area 141SG005U after executing the look-ahead advance notice setting process (S161). Hold display update processing (141SGS281) for displaying the prize ball number display processing (141SGS282) for displaying the prize balls paid out to the image display device 5, and that the game ball has won a prize in one of the winning openings. The winning notification effect execution process (141SGS283) for executing the winning notification effect and the notification that the number of paid out prize balls has reached a predetermined number (for example, 5000 balls, 10000 balls, etc.) After executing the prize ball number notification effect execution process (141SGS284) for executing the prize ball number notification effect, any one of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) is executed.

10-14 to 10-17 are flowcharts showing the prize ball number display process (141SGS282) in the staging control process process. In the prize ball number display process, the effect control CPU 120 is first operating the addition effect process timer (at least one of the first addition effect process timer and the second addition effect process timer), which will be described later. Whether or not it is determined (141SGS300). When the process timer for addition effect is not operating (141SGS300; N), it is determined whether or not the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball number counter is being displayed on the image display device 5 (141SGS301). As shown in FIG. 10-18 (A), the first prize ball number counter in this embodiment is used to win all the prize balls (large prize opening, each starting winning opening, and general winning opening) in the consecutive villas. It is a counter for totaling the prize balls paid out by the player in the range of 0 to 99999.

When the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter is not displayed on the image display device 5 (141SGS301; N), whether or not the value of the effect process flag is "6", that is, the jackpot game is in progress. It is determined whether or not (141SGS302). When the value of the effect process flag is any of "0" to "5" and "7" (141SGS302; N), the prize ball number display process is terminated and the value of the effect process flag is "6". (141SGS302; Y) determines whether or not the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot A (141SGS303). When the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot A (141SGS303; Y), the display of the values 141SG005B of the first prize ball number counter and the second prize ball number counter in the image display device 5 is started and the prize ball number display process is completed. (141SGS304). As shown in FIG. 10-18 (A), the second prize ball counter is the number of prize balls paid out during the big hit game of the probabilistic big hit A (large winning opening, each starting winning opening, general winning opening). The number of prize balls paid out in the special zone (the prize balls paid out by winning the prize) and the number of prize balls paid out in the special zone (the prize balls paid out by winning the big prize opening, each starting winning opening, and the general winning opening) It is a counter for totaling in the range of 9999.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is not the probabilistic jackpot A (141SGS303; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is the probabilistic jackpot B (141SGS305). When the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot B (141SGS305; Y), the display of the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter in the image display device 5 is started and the prize ball number display process is terminated (141SGS306). When the jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (141SGS305; N), the prize is awarded without starting the display of the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter in the image display device 5. The ball number display process is terminated.

Further, when the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter is being displayed in 141SGS301 (141SGS301; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value of the effect process flag is "6" or "7". That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot is in progress (141SGS307). When the value of the effect process flag is "6" or "7" (141SGS307; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the prize ball number notification command reception flag is set, that is, the prize ball number notification command. Is received (141SGS308). When the prize ball number notification command reception flag is not set (141SGS308; N), the prize ball number display processing is terminated, and when the prize ball number notification command reception flag is set (141SGS308; Y), 141SGS317 is set. move on.

When the value of the effect process flag is any of "0" to "5" in 141SGS307 (141SGS307; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special zone flag is set (141SGS309). .. When the special zone flag is set (141SGS309; Y), the above-mentioned 141SGS308 process is executed, and when the special zone flag is not set (141SGS309; N), the gaming state is specified (141SGS310). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the gaming state specified in 141SGS310 is a high base state (141SGS311).

When the gaming state is the high base state (141SGS311; Y), it is determined whether or not the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter is being displayed on the image display device 5 (141SGS312). When the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter is being displayed on the image display device 5 (141SGS312; Y), the display of the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter on the image display device 5 is terminated and the second prize ball number counter is displayed. The value 141SG005B of the 2 prize ball counter is reset to "0" and proceeds to 141SGS308 (141SGS313, 141SGS314). That is, in the feature unit 141SG of the present embodiment, the aggregation of the prize balls in the second prize ball counter is completed at the timing when the special zone ends, and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter in the image display device 5. Is designed to end the display. If the image display device 5 is not displaying the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter (141SGS312; N), the process proceeds to 141SGS308 without executing the processes of 141SGS313 and 141SGS314.

That is, as shown in FIG. 10-18 (C), the second prize ball number counter in the feature unit 141SG of the present embodiment starts counting the prize balls from the big hit game start timing of the probabilistic big hit A, and is in the special zone. If the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state of the probabilistic jackpot, the totaling of prize balls is continued as it is, while when the special zone ends (the variable display of 32 times after the jackpot game of the probabilistic jackpot A is displayed. When it ends), it is a counter that ends the counting of prize balls.

When the gaming state of 141SGS311 is not the high base state (141SGS311; N), that is, when the gaming state becomes the low probability low base state based on the end of 100 fluctuation displays after the end of the jackpot game of the non-probability variable jackpot. Ends the display of the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter in the image display device 5, and resets the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter to "0" to end the prize ball number display process (141SGS315, 141SGS316). That is, as shown in FIG. 10-18 (B), the first prize ball number counter in the feature unit 141SG of the present embodiment is from the start timing of the big hit game at the time of the first hit to the end of the big hit game of the non-probability variable big hit. It is a counter that totals the number of prize balls until the end timing of 100 fluctuation display.

In 141SGS317, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the number of prize balls from the received prize ball number notification command (141SGS317). Then, the current value of the first prize ball number counter 141SG005A is stored as the value of the first prize ball number counter before addition (141SGS318), and the value 141SG005A of the current first prize ball number counter reaches the upper limit value (99999). It is determined whether or not it is (141SGS319). When the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter has not reached the upper limit (141SGS319; N), the specified number of prize balls is added to the first prize ball counter (141SGS320), and the process proceeds to 141SGS321. Further, when the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter has reached the upper limit value (141SGS319; Y), the process proceeds to 141SGS321 without executing 141SGS320.

In the processing of 141SGS320, if the result of adding the specified number of prize balls to the first prize ball number counter exceeds the upper limit value (99999) of the first prize ball number counter, the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball number counter. Is updated to the upper limit value of the first prize ball number counter.

Then, in 141SGS321, the effect control CPU 120 compares the value of the first prize ball number counter before addition and the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball number counter stored in 141SGS318, and the carry is carried out at the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball number counter. Whether or not it has occurred is specified (141SGS321), and whether or not the carry is present is determined (141SGS322). When there is no carry (141SGS322; N), the first addition effect process table for no carry is selected (141SGS323), and the process proceeds to 141SGS325. If there is a carry (141SGS322; Y), the first addition effect process table corresponding to the number of carry digits is selected (141SGS324), and the process proceeds to 141SGS325.

In 141SGS325, the effect control CPU 120 starts the first addition effect process timer in the process data 1 of the selected first addition effect process table (141SGS325). In the feature unit 141SG of the present embodiment, the process table for the first addition effect corresponding to all of the first addition effects according to the presence / absence of carry and the number of digits of the carry is stored in ROM 121 in advance. ..

Then, the effect control CPU 120 is directed by an effect device (for effect) according to the contents of the first process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, etc.) of the set first addition effect process table. Control of the image display device 5 as a component, the game effect lamp 9 as an effect component, and the speakers 8L, 8R) as an effect component is started, and the first addition effect is displayed on the image display device 5. The update of the value 141SG005A of the prize ball number counter is started (141SGS326).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter is being displayed on the image display device 5 (141SGS327). When the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter is not being displayed on the image display device 5 (141SGS327; N), the prize ball number display process is terminated, and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter is displayed on the image display device 5. In the case of (141SGS327; Y), the current value of the second prize ball number counter 141SG005B is stored as the value of the second prize ball number counter before addition (141SGS328), and the value of the current second prize ball number counter is stored. It is determined whether or not 141SG005B has reached the upper limit value (9999) (141SGS329). When the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter has not reached the upper limit (141SGS329; N), the specified number of prize balls is added to the second prize ball counter (141SGS330), and the process proceeds to 141SGS331. If the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter has reached the upper limit (141SGS329; Y), the process proceeds to 141SGS321 without executing 141SGS330.

In the processing of 141SGS330, if the result of adding the specified number of prize balls to the second prize ball counter exceeds the upper limit value (9999) of the second prize ball counter, the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter. Is updated to the upper limit value of the second prize ball number counter.

Then, in 141SGS331, the effect control CPU 120 compares the value of the second prize ball number counter before addition and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball number counter stored in 141SGS338, and the carry is carried out at the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball number counter. Whether or not it has occurred is specified (141SGS331), and whether or not there is such a carry is determined (141SGS332). When there is no carry (141SGS332; N), the second addition effect process table for no carry is selected (141SGS333), and the process proceeds to 141SGS335. If there is a carry (141SGS332; Y), the second addition effect process table according to the number of carry digits is selected (141SGS334), and the process proceeds to 141SGS335.

In 141SGS335, the effect control CPU 120 starts the second addition effect process timer in the process data 1 of the selected second addition effect process table (141SGS335). In the feature unit 141SG of the present embodiment, the process table for the second addition effect corresponding to all of the second addition effects according to the presence / absence of the carry and the number of digits of the carry is stored in the ROM 121 in advance. ..

Then, the effect control CPU 120 is directed by an effect device (for effect) according to the contents of the first process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, etc.) of the set second addition effect process table. Control of the image display device 5 as a component, the game effect lamp 9 as an effect component, and the speakers 8L, 8R) as an effect component is started, and the second addition effect is displayed on the image display device 5. The update of the value 141SG005B (see FIG. 10-20) of the prize ball count counter is started (141SGS336).

Further, when the addition effect process timer is operating in the 141SGS300 (141SGS300; Y), it is determined whether or not the first addition effect process timer is in operation (141SGS501). When the process timer for the first addition effect is not operating (141SGS501; N), the process proceeds to 141SGS521, and when the process timer for the first addition effect is operating (141SGS501; Y), the prize ball pain notification command reception flag is further advanced. Is set or not (141SGS502).

When the prize ball number notification command reception flag is set (141SGS502; Y), the process proceeds to 141SGS511, and when the prize ball number notification command reception flag is not set (141SGS502; N), the process timer for the first addition effect is performed. (141SGS503), and it is determined whether or not the first addition effect process timer has timed out (141SGS504). When the first addition effect process timer is timer-out (141SGS504; Y), it is determined whether or not the timer-out is the last first addition effect process timer (141SGS505). If it is not the last process timer for the first addition effect (141SGS505; N) that the timer is out, the process data is switched and the next process timer for the first addition effect is started (141SGS506, 141SGS507). Then, after controlling the staging device according to the next process data (141SGS508), the process proceeds to 141SGS521.

When the timer is out of the last process timer for the first addition effect (141SGS505; Y), the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball number counter displayed on the image display device 5 is updated and displayed (award). After adding the number of balls, the value of the first prize ball number counter is updated to 141SG005A) (141SGS509), and the process proceeds to 141SGS521.

When the first addition effect process timer does not time out (141SGS504; N), the effect device is controlled according to the process data corresponding to the first addition effect process timer (141SGS510), and the process proceeds to 141SGS521.

Further, in the 141SGS511, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the number of prize balls from the received prize ball number notification command (141SGS511). Then, the current value 141SG005A of the first prize ball number counter is stored as the first prize ball number counter value before addition (141SGS512), and the current value 141SG005A of the first prize ball number counter reaches the upper limit value (99999). It is determined whether or not it is (141SGS513). When the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter has not reached the upper limit (141SGS513; N), the specified number of prize balls is added to the first prize ball counter (141SGS514), and the process proceeds to 141SGS515. Further, when the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter has reached the upper limit value (141SGS513; Y), the process proceeds to 141SGS515 without executing 141SGS514.

In the processing of 141SGS514, if the result of adding the specified number of prize balls to the first prize ball number counter exceeds the upper limit value (99999) of the first prize ball number counter, the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball number counter. Is updated to the upper limit value of the first prize ball number counter.

Then, in 141SGS515, the effect control CPU 120 compares the value of the first prize ball number counter before addition and the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball number counter stored in 141SGS512, and the carry is carried out at the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball number counter. Whether or not it has occurred is specified (141SGS515), and whether or not there is such a carry is determined (141SGS516). When there is no carry (141SGS516; N), the first addition effect being executed is continued by executing the above-mentioned processing of 141SGS503 to 141SGS510. When there is a carry (141SGS516; Y), a process table for the first addition effect corresponding to the number of digits of the carry is newly selected (141SGS517), and the process of the selected process table for the first addition effect is selected. The first addition effect process timer in the data 1 is started (141SGS518). Further, according to the contents of the first process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, etc.) of the set first addition effect process table, the effect device (image display as an effect component). The device 5, the game effect lamp 9 as an effect component, and the speakers 8L, 8R) as an effect component are controlled, and the number of first prize balls displayed on the image display device 5 as a new first addition effect. After starting the update of the counter value 141SG005A (141SGS519), the process proceeds to 141SGS521.

In 141SGS521, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second addition effect process timer is in operation (141SGS521). When the process timer for the second addition effect is not operating (141SGS521; N), the prize ball number display process is terminated, and when the process timer for the second addition effect is operating (141SGS521; Y), the number of prize balls is displayed. It is determined whether or not the notification command reception flag is set (141SGS522).

When the prize ball number notification command reception flag is set (141SGS522; Y), the process proceeds to 141SGS531, and when the prize ball number notification command reception flag is not set (141SGS522; N), the process timer for the second addition effect is performed. (141SGS523), and it is determined whether or not the second addition effect process timer has timed out (141SGS524). When the second addition effect process timer is timer-out (141SGS524; Y), it is determined whether or not the timer-out is the last second addition effect process timer (141SGS525). If it is not the last process timer for the second addition effect (141SGS525; N) that the timer is out, the process data is switched and the next process timer for the second addition effect is started (141SGS526, 141SGS527). Then, after controlling the staging device according to the next process data (141SGS528), the prize ball number display process is terminated.

When the timer is out of the last process timer for the second addition effect (141SGS525; Y), the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball number counter displayed on the image display device 5 is updated and displayed (prize). After adding the number of balls, the value of the second prize ball counter is updated to 141SG005B) (141SGS529), and the prize ball number display process is terminated.

When the second addition effect process timer does not time out (141SGS524; N), the effect device is controlled according to the process data corresponding to the second addition effect process timer (141SGS530), and the prize ball number display process is performed. To finish.

Further, in the 141SGS531, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the number of prize balls from the received prize ball number notification command (141SGS531). Then, the current value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter is stored as the second prize ball counter value before addition (141SGS532), and the current second prize ball counter value 141SG005B reaches the upper limit value (9999). It is determined whether or not it is (141SGS533). If the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter has not reached the upper limit (141SGS533; N), the specified number of prize balls is added to the second prize ball counter (141SGS534), and the process proceeds to 141SGS535. If the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter has reached the upper limit (141SGS533; Y), the process proceeds to 141SGS535 without executing 141SGS534.

In the processing of 141SGS534, if the result of adding the specified number of prize balls to the second prize ball counter exceeds the upper limit value (9999) of the second prize ball counter, the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter. Is updated to the upper limit value of the second prize ball number counter.

Then, in 141SGS535, the effect control CPU 120 compares the value of the second prize ball counter value before addition and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter stored in 141SGS532, and the carry is carried out at the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter. Whether or not it has occurred is specified (141SGS535), and whether or not there is such a carry is determined (141SGS536). When there is no carry (141SGS536; N), the second addition effect being executed is continued by executing the above-mentioned processing of 141SGS523 to 141SGS530. When there is a carry (141SGS536; Y), a second addition effect process table corresponding to the number of carry digits is newly selected (141SGS537), and the process of the selected second addition effect process table is selected. The second addition effect process timer in the data 1 is started (141SGS538). Further, according to the contents of the first process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, etc.) of the set second addition effect process table, the effect device (image display as an effect component). The device 5, the game effect lamp 9 as an effect component, and the speakers 8L, 8R) as an effect component are controlled, and the number of second prize balls displayed on the image display device 5 as a new second addition effect. After starting the update of the counter value 141SG005B (141SGS539), the prize ball number display process is terminated.

FIG. 10-19 is a flowchart showing a winning notification effect execution process (141SGS284) in the effect control process process. In the winning notification effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the winning notification effect process timer is operating (141SGS351). When the process timer for winning notification effect is not operating (141SGS351; N), it is determined whether or not the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball number counter is being displayed on the image display device 5 (141SGS352). When the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter is not being displayed on the image display device 5 (141SGS352; N), the winning notification effect execution process is terminated, and the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter is displayed on the image display device 5. In the case of (141SGS352; Y), it is further determined whether or not the prize ball number notification command reception flag is set (141SGS353).

When the prize ball number notification command reception flag is not set (141SGS353; N), the winning notification effect execution process is terminated, and when the prize ball number notification command reception flag is set (141SGS353; Y), the prize ball number notification command is received. The number of prize balls is specified from the prize ball number notification command (141SGS353). Then, the winning notification effect process table corresponding to the specified number of prize balls is selected (141SGS355), and the winning notification effect process timer in the process data 1 of the selected winning notification effect process table is started (141SGS356). In the feature unit 141SG of the present embodiment, the process table for the prize notification effect corresponding to the prize notification effect according to the number of each prize ball is stored in the ROM 121 in advance.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 is directed by the effect device (effect component) according to the contents of the first process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, etc.) of the set winning notification effect process table. The control of the image display device 5 as the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9 as the effect component, and the speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component) is started, and the prize notification image 141SG005N in the image display device 5 is started as the prize notification effect (FIG. 10-). 20) is started (141SGS357). Further, the effect control CPU 120 clears the prize ball number notification command reception flag and ends the prize notification effect execution process (141SGS358).

On the other hand, when the prize notification effect process timer is operating in 141SGS351 (141SGS351; Y), the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the prize notification effect process timer by -1 (141SGS359), and the prize notification effect process. It is determined whether or not the timer has timed out (141SGS360). When the winning notification effect process timer is out of timer (141SGS360; Y), the process data is switched and the next winning notification effect process timer is started (141SGS361, 141SGS362). Then, the effect device is controlled according to the following process data, and the winning notification effect execution process is terminated (141SGS363).

When the process timer for winning notification effect is not timer-out in 141SGS360 (141SGS360; N), the effect device is controlled according to the process data corresponding to the process timer for winning notification effect, and the winning notification effect execution process is terminated. (141SGS364).

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the prize ball number display process and the prize notification effect execution process, and as shown in FIGS. 10-20 (A) to 10-20 (E), the image display device 5 When the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball count counter is displayed (during a big hit game or during a high base including a special zone), every time a prize is generated by a game ball, a prize is awarded according to the prize as a prize notification effect. The broadcast image 141SG005N is displayed, and the update display of the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball number counter is executed as the first addition effect.

Further, during the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A or during the special zone, the value 141SG005B of the first prize ball counter is displayed together with the value 141SG005B of the first prize ball counter on the image display device 5, and a prize is generated by the game ball. As a second addition effect, the update display of the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter is executed every time.

Further, as the first addition effect and the second addition effect, when the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter do not cause a carry, FIG. 10-20 (B). As shown in, the addition effect targeting only the lowest digit (1's place) is executed. On the other hand, when a carry occurs in the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter as the first addition effect and the second addition effect, FIGS. 10-20 (C) to As shown in FIG. 10-20 (E), the addition effect is executed for the digit in which the carry occurs.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 (A) to 10-21 (C), when the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter have already reached the upper limit. Is executed the first addition effect and the second addition effect according to the winning of the game ball, and the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the second prize are executed by the execution of the first addition effect and the second addition effect. The value 141SG005B of the ball count counter does not change.

FIG. 10-22 is a flowchart showing the prize ball number notification effect execution process (141SGS284) in the effect control process process. In the prize ball number notification effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the prize ball number notification effect process timer is operating (141SGS371). When the process timer for the prize ball number notification effect is not operating (141SGS371; N), it is further determined whether or not the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball number counter is being displayed on the image display device 5 (141SGS372). When the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball number counter is not being displayed on the image display device 5 (141SGS372; N), the prize ball number notification effect execution process is terminated, and the value of the first prize ball number counter on the image display device 5 is displayed. When 141SG005A is being displayed (141SGS372; Y), the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter is specified (141SGS373).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball number counter specified in 141SGS373 has reached a preset predetermined value (notification start threshold value, for example, 5000 or 10000). (141SGS374). When the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball number counter specified in 141SGS333 has not reached the notification start threshold value (141SGS374; N), the prize ball number notification effect execution process is terminated, and the first prize ball number counter specified in 141SGS373 is terminated. When the value 141SG005A has reached the notification start threshold value (141SGS374; Y), the process table for producing the prize ball number notification according to the notification start threshold value is selected (141SGS375). Then, the process timer for the prize ball number notification effect is started (141SGS376). In the feature unit 141SG of the present embodiment, the effect process table for the prize ball number notification effect corresponding to the prize ball number notification effect for each notification start threshold is stored in the ROM 121 in advance.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 is an effect device (effect) according to the contents of the first process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, etc.) of the set prize ball number notification effect process table. The control of the image display device 5 as a component, the game effect lamp 9 as an effect component, the speakers 8L, 8R, etc. as an effect component) is started, and the prize ball number notification effect execution process is completed (141SGS377).

When the prize ball number notification effect process timer is operating in 141SGS371 (141SGS371; Y), the value of the prize ball number notification effect process timer is decremented by -1 (141SGS378), and the prize ball number notification effect process timer is set. Determines whether or not the timer has expired (141SGS379). When the prize ball number notification effect process timer is out of time (141SGS379; Y), the prize ball number notification effect process data is switched (141SGS380). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the next set value of the process timer for the prize ball number notification effect in the process table for the prize ball number notification effect in the process timer (141SGS381). In addition, the control state for the effect device (effect component) is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, etc. included in the process data set next (141SGS382), and the award is given. The ball number notification effect execution process is terminated.

When the process timer for the prize ball number notification effect is not timer-out in 141SGS379 (141SGS379; N), the effect device is controlled according to the process data corresponding to the process timer for the prize ball number notification effect (141SGS383), and the prize is awarded. The ball number notification effect execution process is terminated.

FIG. 10-23 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process process. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable start command reception flag is set (141SGS391). When the first variable start command reception flag is set (141SGS391; Y), it is associated with the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer. The various command data and various flags stored in the above are shifted upward by one buffer number (141SGS392). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Further, when the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in 141SGS391 (141SGS391; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (141SGS393). If the second variation start command reception flag is not set (141SGS393; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variation start command reception flag is set (141SGS393; Y), the start is started. Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the command buffer received at the time of winning are placed at the upper level by one buffer number. Shift (141SGS394). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

After executing 141SGS392 or 141SGS394, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (141SGS395).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol and the small symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (141SGS396). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol and the small symbol according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and uses the data indicating the determined decorative symbol and the stop symbol of the small symbol as the decorative symbol. Store in the display result storage area.

In the feature unit 141SG of the present embodiment, when the received variation display result designation command is the second variation display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 is, for example, 3 as a stop symbol. Determine the combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols) whose symbols are aligned with "7". Further, when the received variation display result specification command is the third variation display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111") are used as stop symbols. It is determined from the combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", and "999"). Further, when the received variation display result specification command is the fourth variation display result specification command corresponding to the non-probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, a decorative symbol in which three symbols are arranged as even symbols as stop symbols. Determine the combination (big hit symbol). If the received variation display result specification command is the fifth variation display result specification command corresponding to a small hit, odd or even combinations (for example, "135" and "246") having three different symbols as stop symbols are used. It is decided from the combination of decorative symbols such as (small hit symbol). If the received variation display result specification command is the first variation display result specification command corresponding to the loss, a combination of decorative symbols in which the three symbols excluding the small hit symbol are not uniform as the stop symbol (loss symbol). To decide.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and determines the stop symbol in which the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbol and the small symbol is associated with the numerical value. The table may be used to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol and the small symbol. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbol and the small symbol corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special zone end flag is set (141SGS397). When the special zone end flag is not set (141SGS397; N), it is further determined whether or not the special zone middle flag is set (141SGS398). When the special zone flag is set (141SGS398; Y), if the decorative symbols are being displayed on the image display device 5, the decorative symbols are hidden and the process proceeds to 141SGS404 (141SGS399). If the special zone flag is not set (141SGS398; N), the process proceeds to 141SGS404 without executing the processing of 141SGS399.

On the other hand, when the special zone end flag is set in 141SGS397 (141SGS397; Y), the special zone end flag is cleared (141SGS3400), and the special zone end notification process table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is selected (141SGS401). ). Then, the display of the first reserved storage display area 141SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 141SG005U in the image display device 5 is started (141SGS402), and the image display device 5 is used for the non-special zone (normal high base state). The display of the background image is started (141SGS403), and the process proceeds to 141SGS404.

Next, in 141SGS404, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (141SGS405).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each lamp, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are sequentially arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various lamps as staging parts, speakers 8L, 8R as staging parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (141SGS406). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 141SG of the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the variation display of the decorative pattern according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one is performed, but the effect control CPU 120 May select a variation pattern to be used from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern specification command.

Then, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is set in the fluctuation time timer (141SGS407). Further, a predetermined time is set in the fluctuation control timer (141SGS408). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and each time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. The variation of the decorative pattern is realized by outputting the signal corresponding to the image data to the image display device 5 and displaying the image corresponding to the signal by the image display device 5. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (141SGS409).

FIG. 10-24 is a flowchart showing the variable display during staging process (S172) in the staging control process process. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 sets the respective values of the process timer, the variation time timer, and the variation control timer by -1 (141SGS411, 141SGS412, 141SGS413). Further, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (141SGS414). When the process timer is out of the timer (141SGS414), the process data is switched (141SGS415). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer setting value set next in the process table to the process timer (141SGS416). Further, the control state for the staging device (staging component) is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, the operation unit control data, etc., which are set next (141SGS417), 141SGS419. Proceed to. On the other hand, when the process timer is not timer-out (141SGS414; N), according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.). The control of the effect device (effect component) is executed (141SGS418), and the process proceeds to 141SGS419.

Next, in 141SGS419, the staging control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the temporary stop timing of the small symbol (141SGS419). In the case of the temporary stop timing of the small symbol, as a part of the pseudo-continuous effect, the small symbol is temporarily stopped with a combination indicating a loss, and the process proceeds to 141SGS421 (141SGS420). If it is not the temporary stop timing of the small symbol (141SGS419; N), the process proceeds to 141SGS421 without executing the processing of 141SGS420.

In 141SGS421, the staging control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the re-variation of the small symbol (141SGS421). When it is the start timing of the re-variation of the small symbol (141SGS421; Y), the re-variation of the temporarily stopped small symbol is started as a part of the pseudo-continuous effect (141SGS422). Then, it is determined whether or not the re-variation is the final re-variation start timing (141SGS423). When it is the last re-variation start timing (141SGS423; Y), the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying the first reserved storage display area 141SGS005D and the second reserved storage display area 141SGS005U in the image display device 5 (141SGS424). , The image display device 5 starts displaying the background image for the non-special zone (normal high base state) (141SGS425). Further, the display of the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter displayed on the image display device 5 is terminated (141SGS426), and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter is reset to "0" to proceed to 141SGS429. (141SGS427).

When it is not the re-variation start timing of the small symbol in 141SGS421 (141SGS421; N) or the last re-variation start timing in 141SGS423 (141SGS423; N), the effect control CPU 120 executes the special zone end notification effect described later. It is determined whether or not it is in the period (141SGS428). If the special zone end notification effect execution period is in progress (141SGS428; Y), the process proceeds to 141SGS429, and if the special zone end notification effect execution period is not in progress (141SGS428; N), the process proceeds to 141SGS430.

In 141SGS429, the effect control CPU 120 executes a special zone end notification effect execution process (141SGS429) for executing a special zone end notification effect for notifying that the special zone has ended, and proceeds to 141SGS430.

In 141SGS430, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the display start timing of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 (141SGS430). When it is the display start timing of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 (141SGS430; Y). , The display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started and the process proceeds to 141SGS432 (141SGS431). Proceed to.

In 141SGS432, the staging control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation control timer is out of the timer (141SGS432). When the fluctuation control timer is out of the timer (141SGS432; Y), the effect control CPU 120 is displayed on the next display screen of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right (30 ms after the previous display switching time of the decorative symbol). Image data of the power screen) is created and written in a predetermined area of VRAM (141SGS433). In this way, the image display device 5 realizes fluctuation control of the decorative pattern. The display control unit 123 transmits a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table to the image display device 5. Output. In this way, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the decorative symbol in the variation of the decorative symbol. Further, the predetermined value is reset to the fluctuation control timer (141SGS434), and the process proceeds to 141SGS435.

Further, when the fluctuation control timer is not timer-out (1141SGS432; N), or after the execution of 141SGS434, the staging control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation time timer is timer-out (141SGS435). If the variable time timer is out of the timer, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (S173) (141SG437). Even if the variable time timer is not timer-out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (141SGS436; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is waited for per special figure (waiting process for the special figure). It is updated to the value corresponding to S173) (141SGS437). Even if the fluctuation time timer is not out of the timer, the control shifts to stop the fluctuation when the symbol confirmation specification command is received. Therefore, for example, a fluctuation pattern specification command indicating a long fluctuation time due to noise between boards is used. Even in the case of reception, the variation of the decorative symbol can be terminated when the regular variation time elapses (at the end of the variation of the special symbol).

In the process table used for controlling the variation of the decorative symbol, the process data during the variation display of the decorative symbol is set. That is, the sum of the process timer setting values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the fluctuation time of the decorative symbol. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n in the processing of 141SGS374 times out, there is no process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and the effect control of the decorative symbol based on the process table ends. do.

FIG. 10-25 is a flowchart showing a special zone end notification effect execution process (141SGS429) in the variable display effect process. In the special zone end notification effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the special zone end notification effect process timer is operating (141SGS441). When the special zone end notification effect process timer is not operating (141SGS441; N), the special zone end notification effect process table is selected (141SGS442), and the process data 1 of the selected special zone end notification effect process table is selected. The process timer for the special zone end notification effect is started (141SGS443). In the feature unit 141SG of the present embodiment, the process table for the special zone notification effect corresponding to the special zone notification effect is stored in the ROM 121 in advance.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 includes the contents of the first process data 1 of the set special zone end notification effect process table (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Etc.), the control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, game effect lamp 9 as the effect component, speakers 8L, 8R, stick controller 31A, push button 31B as the effect component) is started ( 141SGS444), the special zone end notification effect execution process is terminated.

When the special zone end notification effect process timer is operating in 141SGS441 (141SGS441; Y), the value of the special zone end notification effect process timer is decremented by -1 (141SGS445), and the special zone end notification effect process. It is determined whether or not the timer has timed out (141SGS446).

When the special zone end notification effect process timer is out of timer (141SGS446; Y), the process data is switched (141SGS447). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the next set special zone end notification effect process timer setting value in the special zone end notification effect process table to the process timer (141SGS448). In addition, the control state for the staging device (staging component) is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc. that are set next (141SGS449), and special. The zone end notification effect execution process is terminated. On the other hand, when the special zone end notification effect process timer is not timer-out (141SGS446; N), the contents of the process data corresponding to the special zone end notification effect process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, Control of the effect device (effect component) is executed according to the sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc. (141SGS450), and the special zone end notification effect execution process is terminated.

By executing the variation display in the special zone as described above, as shown in FIG. 10-26 (A), the variation display of 32 times after the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A is completed (32 times in the special zone). If none of the fluctuation display results is a big hit, the fluctuation display for 3 seconds is displayed if the fluctuation display result is lost in the special zone, and the fluctuation display for 4 seconds is displayed if the fluctuation display result is a small hit. Will be executed. Further, at the timing when the 32nd variation display in the special zone is completed, the image display device 5 starts displaying the background image for the non-special zone and the decorative pattern, and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter is started. The display ends.

Then, in the 33rd variation display after the end of the jackpot game of the probabilistic jackpot A (the first variation display after the end of the special zone), the special zone end notification effect is executed, and the special zone ends for the player. Is notified.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-26 (B), the nth (32 ≧ n ≧ 1) of the 32 fluctuation displays (32 fluctuation displays in the special zone) after the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A is completed. If the variable display result is a big hit and the big hit type is a probable variable big hit A, in the variable display up to the n-1th time, if the variable display result is lost, the variable display and the variable display result for 3 seconds will be displayed. If it is a small hit, the fluctuation display for 4 seconds is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-26 (C), the nth (32 ≧ n ≧ 1) of the 32 fluctuation displays (32 fluctuation displays in the special zone) after the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A is completed. If the variable display result is a big hit and the big hit type is a probable big hit B or a non-probable variable big hit, in the variable display up to the n-1th time, if the variable display result is lost, the variable display for 3 seconds, If the variation display result is a small hit, the variation display for 4 seconds is executed.

Next, in the nth variation display, the pseudo-continuous effect (temporary stop and re-variation of the small symbol) is repeatedly executed 33-n times every 3 seconds, and at the 33-nth temporary stop timing of the small symbol. The image display device 5 starts displaying the background image for the non-special zone and displaying the decorative pattern, and ends displaying the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter. Then, after the 33rd-nth re-variation of the small symbol is started, the special zone end notification effect is executed, and the player is notified that the special zone has ended.

As described above, in the feature unit 141SG in the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a big hit and the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot A in the variation display in the special zone, the variation display in the special zone is simulated. While the small symbols are derived and displayed in the combination showing the probability variation jackpot A without executing the continuous effect, the variation display result is the jackpot and the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot B or the non-probability variation jackpot in the variation display in the special zone. In that case, after performing a pseudo-ream effect according to the number of remaining fluctuations in the special zone to make it appear as if the special zone has ended, the small symbol is derived and displayed in a combination indicating the probability variation jackpot B or the non-probability variation jackpot. It has become.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 during the big hit game and during the special zone will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-27 and 10-28. First, as shown in FIGS. 10-27 (A) and 10-27 (B), when the variable display result is a big hit and the big hit type is a probabilistic big hit A, the decorative symbol and the small symbol are the probabilistic big hit A. Derived and displayed in the combination shown, the jackpot game of probability variation jackpot A is started. At this time, the display of the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter is started in the upper left portion of the image display device 5. Then, during the big hit game, each time the game ball wins the big winning opening, the starting winning opening, the general winning opening 141SG010A, 141SG010B, 141SG010C, the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter. Will be updated and displayed. At this time, as shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21 described above, the addition effect (first addition effect, second addition effect) and the winning notification effect are also executed.

After the big hit game is completed, as shown in FIG. 10-27 (C), the decorative symbol, the first reserved storage display area 141SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 141SG005U are hidden as special zones and synchronized with the special symbol. Then, the variable display of the small symbol is started. In the feature portion 141SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-27 (B) and 10-27 (C), the image 141SG005X during the big hit game is continuously displayed even in the special zone. It has become. The image 141SG005X during the jackpot game is displayed until the variation display of the jackpot ends in the special zone, but the variation display of 32 times ends.

When the variation display is executed in the special zone where the variation display result is a jackpot and the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot A, the variation display is performed as shown in FIGS. 10-27 (D) and 10-27 (E). As a result, after the small symbols are derived and displayed in a combination indicating the probability variation jackpot A, the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A is started. At this time, the display of the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball number counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball number counter is continuously updated and displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-27 (E), when the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter reaches the notification start threshold during the special zone or the big hit game, an image is displayed as a prize ball number notification effect. A notification image 141SG005H indicating that the number of prize balls has reached the notification start threshold is displayed in the device 5. The feature unit 141SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the notification image 141SG005H is displayed on the image display device 5 as a prize ball number notification effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. The prize ball number notification effect may be executed by sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, light emission of the game effect lamp 9, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 10-27 (F), in the feature unit 141SG of the present embodiment, the number of prize balls that can be totaled by the first prize ball counter (upper limit value of the first prize ball counter). Is larger than the number of prize balls that can be totaled by the second prize ball counter (the upper limit of the second prize ball counter). Therefore, after the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter reaches the upper limit value (9999), the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter is not updated even if a new prize is generated, while the first prize. The value 141SG005A of the ball count counter will continue to be updated. Then, while the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter is not updated in this way, the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter is updated, so that the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter reaches the notification start threshold. If so, the prize ball number notification effect is executed.

That is, in the feature unit 141SG of the present embodiment, the number of first prize balls is displayed in the state where the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter are displayed on the image display device 5. When the value 141SG005A of the counter reaches the notification start threshold value, the prize ball number notification effect is executed regardless of the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball number counter.

Further, when the variable display result is a big hit and the big hit type is a probabilistic big hit B or a non-probable variable big hit is executed in the special zone, it is shown in FIGS. 10-28 (G) to 10-24 (I). As shown, in the small symbol display area 141SG005S, temporary stop and re-variation (pseudo continuous effect) of the small symbol according to the number of remaining fluctuations in the special zone are repeatedly executed. Then, when the re-variation of the last small symbol is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-28 (J), the special zone end notification effect is executed in the image display device 5, and the special zone ends for the player. You will be notified that you have done so.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 (K) and 10-28 (L), the display of the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter in the image display device 5 is terminated, while the display of the decorative symbol is completed. And the display of the first reserved storage display area 141SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 141SG005U is resumed. After that, after the predetermined probability variation jackpot B or the advance notice effect suggesting the non-probability variation jackpot is executed, the effect symbol and the small symbol are derived and displayed in a combination indicating the probability variation jackpot B or the non-probability variation jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 141SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-20, the image display device 5 is awarded the first prize in the high base state including during the big hit game and in the special zone. When the value 141SG005A of the ball number counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball number counter are displayed, the first addition effect and the second addition effect are executed by the game ball winning the winning opening, and these first addition effects are executed. The value 141SG005A of the prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter are updated. If the game ball wins a prize in the winning opening while the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter have reached the upper limit, the first addition effect and the second addition effect are produced. However, the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter are not updated by the execution of the first addition effect and the second addition effect. That is, the first addition effect and the second addition effect are executed regardless of the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball number counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball number counter. Even when the value 141SG005A of the 1st prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the 2nd prize ball counter reach the upper limit, the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-20, the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter are displayed on the image display device 5 in the high base state including during the big hit game and in the special zone. If so, the winning notification is given regardless of whether or not the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter have reached the upper limit by winning the game ball in the winning opening. Since the effect is executed, it is possible to improve the game interest when the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter reach the upper limit.

As shown in FIG. 10-20, the feature unit 141SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a form of notifying the number of prize balls paid out by the prize as a prize notification effect, but the present invention illustrates this. The winning notification effect is not limited to, and may not notify the number of prize balls paid out if it is possible to notify that the game ball has won a prize in any of the winning openings.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-20, the feature unit 141SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which a winning notification effect can be executed based on a game ball winning a prize in any of the winning openings. The present invention is not limited to this, and if a new game ball wins during the execution of the prize notification effect, the running prize notification effect is interrupted and the prize notification effect based on the new prize is created. May be executed. Further, when a new game ball is awarded during the execution of the prize notification effect, the prize notification effect based on the new prize may be executed in the same manner as the running prize notification effect. When a plurality of prize notification effects are executed in duplicate, the position of the prize notification image 141SG005N displayed on the image display device 5 as the running prize notification effect is specified, and the image is used as a new prize notification effect. The winning notification image 141SG005N may be displayed at a position different from the specified position on the display device 5.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-18, the first prize ball number counter is a counter for totaling the number of prize balls paid out during the consecutive villas, while the second prize ball number counter is a probability variation jackpot A. It is a counter for totaling the number of prize balls paid out during the big hit game and in the special zone, that is, the first prize ball number counter is the number of prize balls for a longer period than the second prize ball number counter. It is a counter for totaling. Further, since the first prize ball number counter and the second prize ball number counter individually total the number of prize balls, the effect control CPU 120 has the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball number counter and the second prize. The value 141SG005B of the ball count counter can be displayed separately on the image display device 5.

In the feature unit 141SG of the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out during the consecutive villas and the number of prize balls paid out during the big hit game of the probabilistic big hit A and during the special zone are totaled. The form to be displayed on the image display device 5 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of prize balls paid out during the consecutive villas and the jackpot game of the probabilistic jackpot A are special. Only one of the number of prize balls paid out in the zone may be totaled, and the totaled number of prize balls may be displayed on the image display device 5.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-20, when the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter are displayed on the image display device 5, the prize ball is won by winning the game ball. In the case of payout, the first addition effect and the second addition effect are executed according to the carry generated by adding the number of paid out prize balls, so that the number of paid out prize balls and the number of prize balls are paid out. It is possible to easily grasp the correspondence relationship with the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter.

Although the feature portion 141SG of the present embodiment has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to the feature portion 141SG of these embodiments, and changes and additions are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. Even if there is, it is included in the present invention.

For example, in the feature unit 141SG of the above-described embodiment, as the gaming property of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming ball is won in the big winning opening by launching the gaming ball toward the right gaming area 141SG002R mainly during the big hit game. The present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, for example, as the modified example 113SG-1, the right game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated. From the upstream side to the downstream side of the area 141SG002R, the passing gate 141SG041, the variable winning ball device 141SG006B, and the special variable winning ball device 141SG007 are arranged in order, and the game ball is hit during the right-handed hit after the big hit game. By passing through the second starting winning opening formed by the passing gate 141SG041 and the variable winning ball device 141SG006B, the small hit game is executed frequently, and the gaming ball wins the large winning opening during the small hit game. It may be possible to increase the number of balls held. In the configuration of such a modification 113SG-1, instead of the special variable winning ball device 141SG007, a special variable winning ball device for big hits and a special variable winning ball device for small hits are provided for big hits. A special variable winning ball device may be provided on the upstream side of the variable winning ball device 141SG006B. In this way, by providing the special variable winning ball device for big hits on the upstream side of the variable winning ball device 141SG006B, during the big hit game, the special variable for big hits before the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 141SG006B. Since the game ball can enter the big prize opening of the prize ball device, the big hit game can proceed smoothly.

Further, in the case where it is possible to increase the number of balls held by the game ball winning the large winning opening during the small hit game in this way, the hit probability in the variable display of the normal symbol is not related to the game state. Not the same (for example, 1/1 hit probability), and the ratio of small hits in the variable display of the second special symbol is set higher than the ratio of small hits in the variable display of the first special symbol (for example, the first). 1 Set the ratio of small hits in the variable display of the special symbol to 0, and set the ratio of small hits in the variable display of the second special symbol to 299/300).

Then, after the jackpot game of a specific jackpot type (for example, probability variation jackpot B or non-probability variation jackpot B) is completed, the variation display of the normal symbol executed based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 141SG041 becomes "hit". By setting the opening period of the variable winning ball device 141SG006B to the first period, even if a small hit occurs, the game ball flowing down the right game area 141SG002R wins a prize in the second starting winning opening and a big prize. In the mouth, after the game ball is completed in the first KT state (probability change state and first KT state or low probability state and first KT state) in which it is difficult to win a prize, and the big hit game of another jackpot type (for example, probability variation jackpot A). Set the opening period of the variable winning ball device 141SG006B to the second period, which is shorter than the first period, when the variation display of the normal symbol executed based on passing through the passing gate 141SG041 becomes "hit". Then, it is possible to control the large winning opening opened by the occurrence of a small hit to the second KT state (probability change state and the second KT state) in which the game ball is easier to win than the first KT state, and the big prize during the small hit game. It may be possible to prevent the number of balls held from increasing excessively due to the winning of the game ball in the mouth.

In the KT state (first KT state and second KT state), the second special symbol is changed and displayed by launching the game ball toward the right game area 141SG002R, so that the game ball is directed toward the left game area 141SG002L. This is a state in which the variation display result is more likely to be a small hit than in the normal state (low accuracy state and non-KT state) in which the variation display of the first special symbol is executed by launching. That is, the KT state is an advantageous state for the player who can generate small hits more frequently than the non-KT state mainly by executing the variable display of the second special symbol.

Next, as described above, the transition of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can be controlled to the first KT state and the second KT state will be described. First, in the normal state (low probability state and non-KT state), the player mainly aims at the start winning to the first starting winning opening by launching the game ball toward the left game area 141SG002L. Therefore, in the normal state, the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. When the variation display result is a big hit in the normal state, the gaming state after the big hit game is set to one of the high accuracy state and the second KT state, the high accuracy state and the first KT state, and the low accuracy state and the first KT state. Be controlled. For example, after the jackpot game of the probabilistic jackpot A is completed, the gaming state is controlled to the highly accurate state and the second KT state, and after the jackpot game of the probabilistic jackpot B is completed, the gaming state is controlled to the highly accurate state and the first KT state, and the non-probability change. After the big hit game is completed, the game state is controlled to the low probability state and the first KT state.

In the game state after the end of these big hit games, the player aims to win a start prize in the second start winning opening or a prize in the big winning opening by launching the game ball toward the right game area 141SG002R. When the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy state and the second KT state or the high accuracy state and the first KT state, these high accuracy states and the second KT state or the high accuracy until the variation display result of the special symbol becomes a big hit again. The state and the first KT state are maintained. On the other hand, when the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy state and the first KT state, the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy state and It is controlled to the non-KT state).

Then, during the KT state, the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, so that the variation display result becomes a small hit with a high probability, and the large winning opening is opened in the small hit game. Here, in the case of the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 141SG006B arranged on the upstream side of the large winning opening is open for the first period with high probability even during the small hit game. Therefore, most of the game balls win the second start winning opening, and it becomes difficult to win the big winning opening. On the other hand, in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 141SG006B arranged on the upstream side of the large winning opening during the small hit game is closed at a higher rate than in the first KT state. More game balls than in the 1KT state are designed to win the big winning opening without winning the second starting winning opening.

In the present modification 113SG-1, when the variable display result is a big hit and the big hit type is the probability variable big hit A, the embodiment in which the gaming state is always controlled to the second KT state is illustrated, but the present invention exemplifies. Not limited to this, when the variation display result of the second special symbol is a big hit and the big hit type is a probability variable big hit A in the normal state (low probability state and non-KT state), that is, the game ball is left-played. The second special symbol variation display is executed by the player launching the game ball toward the right gaming area 141SG002R even though the game state is to launch toward the area 141SG002L, and the variation display result is a big hit. When the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot A, the gaming state may not be controlled to the second KT state (controlled to the high probability state and the first KT state) after the jackpot game is completed. By doing so, some players actively launch the game ball toward the right game area 141SG002R in order to execute the variable display of the second special symbol in the normal state, and the original game playability is impaired. It can be prevented from being lost.

In the modified example 113SG-1, the winning ratio of the game ball to the large winning opening during the small hit game is different by making the opening period of the variable winning ball device 141SG006B different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Although the embodiment is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and by making the number of openings of the variable winning ball device 141SG006B different between the first KT state and the second KT state, a big prize is won during the small hit game. The winning ratio of the game ball to the mouth may be different.

In this way, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to the second KT state and the number of balls (prize balls) is increased in the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state in the second KT state, the game is to be playable. As shown in FIGS. 10-29 to 10-31, the prize ball number display 141SG300, 141SG303, 141SG305 may be displayed on the image display device 5 during the big hit game, in the first KT state and the second KT state.

Further, during the big hit game, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 (A) to 10-29 (C), the character 1078SG301, "Big hit!", Etc. are displayed on the image display device 5 together with the prize ball number display 141SG300. When the character display 141SG302 is displayed and the game ball wins in the big prize opening, the display of the prize ball number display 141SG300 is updated at the first speed (for example, the display of the prize ball number display 141SG300 is set to 0.1 seconds. It may be updated over).

Further, in the first KT state, as shown in FIGS. 10-30 (A) to 10-30 (C), the prize ball number display 141SG303 is displayed on the image display device 5, and a small hit occurs. Displays a character display 141SG304 such as "small hit occurrence!", And when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening during the small hit game in the first KT state, the display of the prize ball number display 141SG303 is displayed in the big hit game. It may be updated at the first speed as in the middle.

Then, in the second KT state, as shown in FIGS. 10-31 (A) to 10-31 (C), the prize ball number display 141SG305 is displayed on the image display device 5, and a small hit occurs. The character display 141SG306 such as "small hit has occurred!" May be displayed. Further, when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening during the small hit game in the second KT state, a character display such as character 141SG308 or "+15" as a prize ball increase display is displayed on the image display device 5 as a winning effect. , And the effect image 141SG307 may be displayed around the prize ball number display 141SG305. Then, the display of the prize ball number display 141SG305 is updated at the second speed, which is slower than the first speed (for example, the display of the prize ball number display 141SG305 is updated over 0.5 seconds), that is, a big hit game. The number of prize balls is displayed by changing the update speed of 141SG300, 141SG303, and 141SG305 according to whether the game ball has won the big prize opening in the middle, the 1st KT state, or the 2nd KT state. You may pay attention to the update speed of 141SG300, 141SG303, and 141SG305 to improve the game entertainment.

As described above, in the present modification 113SG-1, two patterns (a pattern for updating and displaying the prize ball number display 141SG300 and 141SG303 at the first speed) are used as patterns for updating and displaying the prize ball number display 141SG300, 141SG303, and 141SG305. By providing the pattern of updating and displaying the prize ball number display 141SG305 at the second speed), it is possible to improve the interest in the game when the prize ball number is updated and displayed. In particular, in the present modification 113SG-1, when the small hit probability in the second KT state is set to a predetermined probability (for example, 50% or the like), the game ball to the big winning opening during the second KT state is more than during the big hit game. The winning frequency will be low. Therefore, by updating the display of the prize ball number display 141SG305 at the second speed, which is slower than the first speed, the game ball is interrupted at the big prize opening even if the winning frequency to the big winning opening is lower than during the big hit game. Since it is possible to make the player feel as if he / she has won a prize, it is possible to have a small hit interval and improve the game entertainment.

In the modified example 113SG-1, the common large winning opening may be opened during the big hit game and the small hit game, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a plurality of large winning openings during the big hit game. The large winning opening that opens during the small hit game may be different from the large winning opening that opens during the small hit game.

Further, a state in which the game ball is launched toward the right game area 141SG002R as in the feature portion 141SG of the embodiment and the modified example 113SG-1 (big hit game state, high accuracy high base state, first KT state, second KT). In the state, etc.), the image display device 5 displays a promotion image prompting the player to launch the game ball toward the right game area 141SG002R, and the general winning opening 141SG010C provided in the right game area 141SG002R displays a promotion image. When the game ball wins, a winning sound for notifying that the game ball has won the general winning opening 141SG010C may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. On the other hand, a state in which the game ball is launched toward the right game area 141SG002R as in the feature portion 141SG of all the embodiments and the modified example 113SG-1 (big hit game state, high accuracy high base state, first KT state, first). When a game ball wins in the general winning openings 141SG010A and 141SG010B provided in the left gaming area 141SG002L in (2KT state, etc.), the promotion image is displayed by not notifying the winning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. Prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the game ball entering the left game area 141SG002L during the big hit game state, high accuracy high base state, first KT state, second KT state, etc. can.

When the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to the first KT state or the second KT state as in the modified example 113SG-1, the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state can be controlled during the advantageous period in the present invention. The first KT state and the second KT state are included.

Further, in the feature unit 141SG of the above-described embodiment, the image 141SG005X during the jackpot game is continuously displayed on the image display device 5 and the decorative pattern is hidden in the special zone after the probability variation jackpot A jackpot game is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-33 as a modified example 113SG-2, in the special zone, the image 141SG005X during the jackpot game Instead of the image, the decorative pattern may be displayed in a mode different from the normal state (low accuracy low base state) and the high accuracy high base state excluding the special zone.

When the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode different from the normal state (low accuracy low base state) and the high accuracy high base state excluding the special zone, for example, FIGS. 10-32 (A) to 10-. As shown in 32 (E), a plurality of "7" decorative symbols are displayed in parallel from the front side to the back side of the image display device 5 in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 141SG005L and 141SG005R. In the "middle" decorative symbol display area 141SG005C, only the decorative symbol of 1 "6" is displayed. That is, the decorative symbols displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 141SG005L and 141SG005R from the state where the decorative symbols are stopped at the combination indicating the reach loss of the probability variation jackpot A (combination of "767"). Is shifted forward, and the variable display is executed by rotating the decorative symbol displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 141SG005C in the horizontal direction. Further, the small symbol may be displayed in a variable manner in the same manner as the feature portion 141SG of the above embodiment in conjunction with the decorative symbol.

In addition, in the variable display of the loss in these special zones, the decorative symbol and the small symbol are derived and displayed by the combination of the reach loss of the probability variation jackpot A (combination of "767"). In this way, by deriving and displaying the decorative symbol and the small symbol in the special zone by the combination of the reach loss of the probabilistic jackpot A, the decorative symbol and the small symbol are derived and displayed by the combination of the probabilistic jackpot A in the special zone. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not (whether or not the notification of the probability variation jackpot A is executed by the combination of the decorative symbol and the small symbol).

Further, in the variation display of the loss in the special zone, the variation display is completed in 3 seconds (the variation display is executed by the variation pattern of PA1-4 shown in FIG. 10-4), so that the decorative symbol and the small symbol are displayed. Is derived and displayed every 3 seconds with a combination of reach loss of probability variation jackpot A, and it is more effective for the player to determine whether or not the decorative symbol and the small symbol are derived and displayed with the combination of probability variation jackpot A in the special zone. It is possible to draw attention.

When the variable display result is a big hit and the big hit type is a probable variable jackpot B or a non-probable variable jackpot variable display is executed in the special zone, as shown in FIGS. 10-33 (F) to 10-33 (K). In addition, if the pseudo-continuous effect of the number of times according to the remaining number of fluctuations in the special zone is executed and the decorative symbol and the small symbol are derived and displayed in a combination indicating the probable change jackpot B or the non-probability change jackpot via the special zone end notification effect. good.

As described above, in the special zone in the modified example 113SG-2, the shortened fluctuation display for 3 seconds is continuously executed, and when the fluctuation display result is lost, the decorative symbol and the small symbol are probablely changed. By deriving and displaying by combining the reach loss of the jackpot A, the player pays attention to whether or not the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A is executed again in succession to the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A that triggered the special zone. It is possible to make it. Furthermore, when the variable display result becomes a big hit in the special zone, the decorative symbol and the small symbol are always derived and displayed in a combination indicating the probability variable jackpot A (the jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot depending on the combination of the decorative symbol and the small symbol). Since it is notified that it is A), it is possible to give the player a special feeling that the decorative symbol and the small symbol are derived and displayed in the combination indicating the probability variation jackpot A in the special zone.

Further, in the variation display of the probability variation jackpot A in the special zone, the variation display ends in 3 seconds in the same manner as the variation display of the loss (the variation display is executed according to the variation pattern of PC1-1 shown in FIG. 10-4). Therefore, the decorative symbol and the small symbol are suddenly derived and displayed as a combination of the probabilistic jackpot A, which can give the player a surprising feeling and shorten the interval between the continuous probabilistic jackpot A jackpot games. Because you can do it, you can improve your hobby.

Further, in the feature unit 141SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-18, the number of prize balls paid out during the consecutive villas is totaled by the first prize ball number counter, and the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A is performed. Although the mode in which the number of prize balls paid out in the special zone is totaled by the second prize ball count counter is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and these first prize ball count counters are used. The state in which the number of prize balls is totaled by the second prize ball number counter (big hit game state or high base state) is a state in which the game ball is launched mainly toward the right game area 141SG002R. When the number of prize balls is totaled by these first prize ball count counters and second prize ball count counters, the winning openings provided in the right game area 141SG002R (second starting winning opening, large winning opening, etc.) The prize balls when the game ball wins in the general prize opening 141SG010C) are totaled, while the winning openings provided in the left game area 141SG002L (general winning opening 141SG010A, general winning opening 141SG010B, first starting winning opening). The prize balls when the game balls are won may not be counted. By doing so, it is possible to execute an appropriate totaling of the number of prize balls according to the gaming state in the first prize ball number counter and the second prize ball number counter.

Further, in the modification 113SG-1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to the second KT state, and the number of balls (prize balls) is increased in the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state in the second KT state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to the second KT state, and the ball (prize ball) is held in the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state in the second KT state. ) Is to be increased, the jackpot gaming state and the small hitting state are used for the period from the jackpot gaming state or the second KT state to the first KT state or the normal state (the period during the consecutive villas). Even if the total number of times controlled by the winning game state is totaled and an image (hit notification image 141SG005P) for notifying the player of the totaled number of times (total number of times per game) is displayed on the image display device 5. good.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-34 (A) to 10-34 (E) as a modified example 143SG-1, first, the decorative symbol and the small hit symbol are derived as a combination showing a big hit in a normal state. When it is displayed, the hit notification image 141SG005P for notifying that the total number of hits is one is displayed on the image display device 5 at the start of the big hit game. Then, in the second KT state controlled after the end of the big hit game, when the decorative symbol and the small hit symbol are derived and displayed again in a combination indicating a big hit, or when they are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a small hit, the total number of hits is displayed. The hit notification image 141SG005P may be displayed by incrementing the value of +1 and notifying that the total number of hits is 2 on the image display device 5 at the start of the big hit game or the start of the small hit game.

Further, when the hit notification image 141SG005P is displayed on the image display device 5 at the start of the big hit game or the small hit game in this way, every time the total number of hits reaches a predetermined number, the total number of hits becomes a predetermined number. You may perform an effect of notifying that it has been reached.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-35 (F) to 10-35 (H), when the total number of hits reaches 5, first, the image at the start of the big hit game or the small hit game. On the display device 5, the hit notification image 141SG005P for notifying that the total number of hits is the fifth is displayed. Further, the character image 141SG005Ma for notifying that the total number of times per hit has reached 5 is displayed on the image display device 5.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-35 (I) to 10-35 (K), when the total number of hits reaches 10, first, the image display device 5 at the start of the big hit game or the small hit game 5 In, the hit notification image 141SG005P for notifying that the total number of hits is the 10th is displayed. Further, the character image 141SG005Mb for notifying that the total number of times per hit has reached 10 is displayed on the image display device 5.

As described above, in the present modification 143SG-1, the total number of times controlled by the big hit game state and the small hit game state is totaled as the total number of hits, and the total number of hits is calculated at the start of the big hit game or the small hit game. By displaying the corresponding hit notification image 141SG005P, it is possible to notify the player of the total number of hits. Further, by displaying the character images 141SG005Ma and 141SG005Mb on the image display device 5, it is possible to notify the player that the total number of hits has reached a multiple of 5. When the total number of hits reaches the upper limit that can be aggregated, the total number of hits notified by the hit notification image 141SG005P by being further controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state is the upper limit value (upper limit number of times). ), While the display of the character images 141SG005Ma and 141SG005Mb is continuously executed (notification that the total number of times has reached a multiple of 5 is continuously executed), so that the total number of times per hit is Even when the upper limit that can be aggregated is reached, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, since the display of the character images 141SG005Ma and 141SG005Mb on the image display device 5 can be executed regardless of whether or not the total number of hits has reached the upper limit that can be aggregated, the upper limit that the total number of hits can be aggregated is possible. When the value is reached, the game entertainment can be further improved.

Further, in the present modification 143SG-1, the hit notification image 141SG005P is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the fact that it is controlled to the big hit gaming state or controlled to the small hit gaming state, that is, it is controlled to the big hit gaming state. The total number of hits is updated when the game is controlled to a small hit game state, and the hit notification image 141SG005P corresponding to the updated total number of hits is displayed on the image display device 5, so that the updated total hits. An appropriate hit notification image 141SG005P can be displayed on the image display device 5 according to the number of times.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present modification 143SG-1 has a gaming property that can mainly increase the number of balls (prize balls) held in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state in the second KT state. Since the hit notification image 141SG005P can be notified as the total number of times controlled by the big hit game state and the small hit game state in terms of game playability, it is possible to improve the game interest in the second KT state.

Further, in the present modification 143SG-1, as shown in FIGS. 10-35 (H) and 10-35 (K), a different character image is displayed on the image display device 5 every time the total number of hits reaches a multiple of 5. (Character image 141SG005Ma, 141SG005Mb) is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the image display device 5 displays each time the total number of times reaches a multiple of 5. The character image may always be the same character image. Further, when a different character image is displayed on the image display device 5 every time the total number of times reaches a multiple of 5, the character images to be displayed on the image display device 5 may be displayed in a predetermined order. Or it may be displayed randomly.

Further, in the present modification 143SG-1, the character image (character image 141SG005Ma, 141SG005Mb) is displayed on the image display device 5 every time the total number of hits reaches a multiple of 5, so that the player can see the total number of hits. Although the form of notifying that the number of times has reached a multiple of 5 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, etc. are used in total. The player may be notified that the number of hits has reached a multiple of 5.

Further, in the present modification 143SG-1, the character image (character image 141SG005Ma, 141SG005Mb) is displayed on the image display device 5 every time the total number of hits reaches a multiple of 5, so that the player can see the total number of hits. The present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. The character image may be displayed in 5.

Further, in the present modification 143SG-1, the total number of times the game state is controlled to the big hit game state and the small hit game state over the period from the big hit game state or the second KT state to the first KT state or the normal state. 10-36 shows an example in which an image (hit notification image 141SG005P) for notifying the player of the totaled number of times (total number of times per hit) is displayed on the image display device 5. As shown in (L) and FIG. 10-36 (O), when the total number of hits reaches the upper limit value (for example, 99 times) that can be aggregated, the game is newly controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Even if the total number of hits reaches 100 (when the total number of hits reaches 100), the hit notification image 141SG005P indicating that the total number of hits is the upper limit that can be aggregated at the start of the big hit game or the small hit game is displayed on the image display device 5. It may be displayed in. Further, when the total number of hits exceeds the upper limit that can be aggregated, but is newly controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state, FIGS. 10-36 (O) to 10-36 (Fig. 10-36). As shown in P), the hit notification image 141SG005P indicating that the total number of hits is the upper limit value that can be totaled at the start of the big hit game or the small hit game is displayed on the image display device 5, while the total number of hits is 5. The display of the character image 141SG005Ma for notifying that the multiple times of the above has been reached may be executed.

In the present modification 143SG-1, the number of times the game state is controlled to the big hit game state and the small hit game state are controlled over the period from the big hit game state or the second KT state to the first KT state or the normal state. Although the embodiment in which the total number of times is totaled is exemplified as the total number of times, the present invention is not limited to this, and the total number of times per unit is only the number of times controlled to the big hit gaming state or small. Only the number of times controlled by the winning game state may be totaled.

Further, in the present modification 143SG-1, as shown in FIGS. 10-36, the hit notification image 141SG005P is displayed on the image display device 5 at the start of the big hit game or the small hit game, so that the player can be hit in total. Although the form of notifying the number of times is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing of displaying the notified image 141SG005P on the image display device 5 is such that the decorative symbol in the variable display is a big hit or a small hit. It may be the timing derived and displayed by the combination of the above, the end timing of the big hit game, the small hit game, and the like. Further, as a modification 143SG-2, in the hit notification image 141SG005P, the period from the big hit game state, the small hit game state, the second KT state, etc. to the normal state or the first KT state, that is, the second KT state. It may be always displayed during the execution of the variable display a plurality of times in the above, during the big hit game, and during the small hit game. In this case, the hit notification image 141SG005P may be updated and displayed when the big hit game state or the small hit game state is controlled so that the player can be notified of the new total number of hits. By doing so, the player can recognize the total number of times per hit even during the variable display, so that the interest can be improved.

Further, the feature unit 141SG of the above-described embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the number of prize balls given to the image display device 5 during a big hit game, a special zone, a high base, etc. can be displayed. The image display device 5 is not limited to this, and may be able to display the net increase in the number of game balls during these big hit games, in the special zone, in the high base, and the like. By doing so, the player can more accurately grasp the number of game balls acquired by the player.

Further, in the feature unit 141SG of the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a gaming machine (so-called type 1 machine) capable of executing a variable display of a special symbol and controlling the jackpot gaming state based on the variable display result. Although the embodiment is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the variable display of the special symbol, and the inside of the big winning opening during the small hit game. It may be a gaming machine (so-called type 1 type 2 mixing machine) that can be controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a specific area provided in. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is such a type 1 type 2 mixing machine, in a normal state, a game ball is launched into the left gaming area to execute a variable display of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol is executed. When the game state is controlled to the big hit game state based on the variable display of the symbol, the small hit game state based on the variable display of the second special symbol is launched by launching the game ball into the right game area in the high base state after the end of the big hit game. It is a game property in which a game ball is made to enter the specific area and controlled to a big hit game state.

Then, the first special period for executing the variation display of the predetermined number of times of the second special figure in the high base state and the remaining time reduction number of times are 0, and the second special symbol is based on the four second special figure hold storages. In the second special period in which the variation display is executed, different effects may be executed depending on whether or not the variation display result is a big hit or a small hit.

For example, when the fluctuation display result is a big hit or a small hit in the fluctuation display of the first special period, a pseudo-continuous effect of the number of times corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations in the first special period is executed in the fluctuation display, and the second In the variable display during the special period, the staging symbol may appear to be derived and displayed by a combination of a big hit and a small hit.

Further, in the feature unit 141SG of the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) by transmitting a special zone start notification command and a special zone end notification command. Although the embodiment in which it can be determined whether or not the player is in the special zone is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 120 for staging control is the number of fluctuations displayed after the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A is completed. It may be determined whether or not it is in the special zone. In this way, when determining whether or not the effect control CPU 120 is in the special zone based on the number of fluctuations displayed after the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A ends, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is in the special zone, the CPU 103 determines the special zone start notification command or the special zone end notification. Since it is not necessary to send a command, these special zone start notification commands and special zone end notification commands may be excluded from the staging control command.

Further, in the feature unit 141SG of the above-described embodiment, the mode of shifting to the special zone only after the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A ends is exemplified, but the transition to the special zone is made even after the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot B ends. You may.

Further, in the feature unit 141SG of the above-described embodiment, the special zone is executed up to 32 times of special figure games (32 times of variable display) in the high accuracy and high base state after the big hit game of the probability variation big hit A. Although the form of the period is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special zone is a special figure of 32 times in a high base state (whether high accuracy or low accuracy) after the end of the big hit game. It may be the period until the game is executed. That is, the player may move to the special zone after the big hit game of the non-probable change big hit is completed.

In addition, as described above, in the case of a form in which the special zone can be transferred after the end of a plurality of big hit games, the number of special figure games (variable display number) controlled in the special zone is different according to the completed big hit game. May be good.

Further, in the feature unit 141SG of the above-described embodiment, when the variation display result is a big hit and the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot A in the variation display in the special zone, the variation pattern of the variation display is set to the special figure variation time of 3. Although the embodiment in which the fluctuation pattern of PC1-1 is a second is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as described above, the case where the special zone can be transferred after the completion of a plurality of big hit games. May change the target jackpot type of the fluctuation pattern of PC1-1 in the special zone according to the finished jackpot type. For example, when the player shifts to the special zone after the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot B ends, the variation pattern of the variation display is changed when the variation display result is the jackpot and the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot B in the variation display in the special zone. If the game is executed in the fluctuation pattern of PC1-1 with a special figure fluctuation time of 3 seconds and the game shifts to the special zone after the jackpot game of non-probability change jackpot is completed, the fluctuation display result is a jackpot in the fluctuation display in the special zone. When the jackpot type is a non-probability variation jackpot, the variation pattern of the variation display may be executed with the variation pattern of PC1-1 having a special figure variation time of 3 seconds.

Further, in the feature unit 141SG of the above-described embodiment, an embodiment in which the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter can be displayed on the image display device 5 is exemplified. The pachinko game machine 1 is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a display device different from the image display device 5, and the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter are set in the display device. It may be displayable.

Further, in the feature unit 141SG of the above-described embodiment, the "game value" in the present invention is set as a prize ball to be paid out according to a prize in any of the winning openings of the game ball, and the total number of prize balls is the first prize. Although the embodiment of displaying on the image display device 5 as the value 141SG005A of the ball number counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball number counter is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the "game value" in the present invention is defined. The number of times controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the number of times controlled by these big hit game states, the number of times controlled by the small hit game state, or the number of times controlled by the big hit game state and the small hit game state. The image display device 5 may display the total number of times with the controlled number of times.

Further, in the modified example 143SG-1 of the above-described embodiment, the "game value" in the present invention is set to the total number of times controlled in the big hit gaming state and the number of times controlled in the small hit gaming state, and these big hits are taken. An example is an example in which the hit notification image 141SG005P corresponding to the total number of times controlled in the gaming state and the number of times controlled in the small hit gaming state is displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is limited to this. The "game value" in the present invention is defined as a prize ball to be paid out according to a prize in any of the winning openings of the game ball, and the total number of prize balls is the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball number counter. The value 141SG005B of the second prize ball number counter may be displayed on the image display device 5.

Further, in the feature unit 141SG of the above-described embodiment, the first prize, which is the total number of prize balls in the consecutive villas (the prize balls paid out by winning the large winning opening, each starting winning opening, and the general winning opening). The value of the ball number counter 141SG005A and the number of prize balls paid out during the big hit game of the probability change big hit A (the prize balls paid out by winning the big prize opening, each starting winning opening, and the general winning opening) and in the special zone The value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter, which is the number of prize balls paid out to (the prize balls paid out by winning the large winning opening, each starting winning opening, and the general winning opening), is displayed on the image display device 5. However, in the modified example 143SG-1 of the above-described embodiment, the number of times the game is controlled to the jackpot game state during the consecutive villa instead of the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter. An example is an example in which the hit notification image 141SG005P corresponding to the aggregated value of the number of times controlled in the small hit game state is displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first prize ball number is not limited to this. In addition to the counter value 141SG005A and the second prize ball number counter value 141SG005B, the hit notification image 141SG005P may be displayed on the image display device 5.

Further, in the feature unit 141SG of the above-described embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out during the big hit game state, the small hit game state, and the high base state is totaled, and the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter is set. 2 The form of displaying on the image display device 5 as the value 141SG005B of the prize ball counter is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the modified example 113SG-1 and the modified example 143SG-1 are exemplified. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can be controlled during the game state, the small hit game state, the first KT state, and the second KT state, the big hit game state, the small hit game state, the first KT state, and the second KT state are in progress. The number of prize balls paid out to the user may be totaled and displayed on the image display device 5 as the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter or the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter.

Further, in the feature unit 141SG of the embodiment, when the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter reach the upper limit value that can be aggregated, the display mode from the display of the upper limit value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter reach the upper limit value that can be aggregated. If so, the display mode is changed to indicate that the values of these counters have reached the upper limit value that can be aggregated (for example, when the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball number counter reaches the upper limit value "99999". When the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball number counter reaches the upper limit value "9999", these values may be changed to a display such as "Dalian Zhuangchu").

Further, the feature unit 141SG of the above-described embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the addition effect (first addition effect or second addition effect) and the winning notification effect are individually executed, but the present invention is limited to this. These addition effects and winning notification effects may be performed in conjunction with each other. Specifically, the winning notification effect is executed based on the winning of the game ball, and the winning notification image 141SG005N displayed on the image display device 5 as the winning notification effect is used as the first prize ball number counter or the second prize ball number counter. The addition effect may be executed by acting so as to be sucked.

Further, in the feature unit 141SG in the above-described embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of a gaming machine. For example, a game is created by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using a gaming value. Is possible to start, and one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to an image display device capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified by each, and the variable display derived to the image display device is completed. It can also be applied to slot machines where prizes can be generated according to the result. In the slot machine, for example, the total number of prize balls (number of medals) paid out during the bonus and the number of prize balls (number of medals) paid out during ART, and the prize paid out during ART. The number of balls (number of medals) may be displayed individually, and the present invention may be applied to the display of the number of prize balls.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a form in which a title corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach is displayed from the start of the reach effect of the super reach (feature portion 31AK in FIGS. 8-1 to 8-12). Different commands are transmitted from the main board 11 (CPU 103) to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) according to the activated state of the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the cold start and the setting is changed. It is possible to execute an effect (startup notification) in a different mode from the case of activation, and a form of notifying that the RAM 102 is cleared when the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed (FIGS. 9-1 to 9). -27 feature section 122SG), the number of prize balls aggregated during the consecutive villas is displayed on the image display device 5 as the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter, and these first prizes. Even after the value 141SG005A of the ball number counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball number counter reach the upper limit value that can be aggregated, the addition effect (the first addition effect and the first addition effect for updating the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball number counter). 2 While executing the second addition effect for updating the value 141SG005B of the prize ball number counter, the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball number counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball number counter after the addition effect are not updated. , A form of executing a winning notification effect for notifying that a gaming ball has won a prize in any of the winning openings regardless of the value of the first prize ball counter value 141SG005A or the second prize ball number counter value 141SG005B ( Although the feature portions 141SG) of FIGS. 10-1 to 10-28 are illustrated, a plurality of feature portions among these feature portions may be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the feature unit 122SG and the feature unit 141SG are applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, so that the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed. It may be possible to execute an addition effect, a winning notification effect, a prize ball number notification effect, a special zone end notification effect, and the like in a manner different from the case of the above. Further, at least a part of the production modes such as the addition effect, the winning notification effect, the prize ball number notification effect, and the special zone end notification effect may be different depending on the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 4A 1st special symbol display device 4B 2nd special symbol display device 5 Image display device 11 Main board 12 Production control board 103 CPU
120 CPU for staging control

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can play games,
A game value-giving means that can add a game value of a size corresponding to the specific event that has occurred based on the occurrence of the specific event.
A game value aggregation means that can aggregate the given game value,
It is possible to display a value display that can specify the aggregated total game value, and the value display is set to operate in a predetermined manner based on the occurrence of the specific event, and the game value given by the occurrence of the specific event is A value display means that can update the aggregated new aggregated game value to a identifiable value display,
Equipped with
The value display means is
After the total game value reaches the upper limit, the value is displayed in the upper limit arrival display mode.
When the specific event occurs while the value is displayed in the upper limit value arrival display mode, the value display in the upper limit value arrival display mode is performed by the number of digits of the game value given by the specific event. After that, the value is displayed again in the upper limit arrival display mode.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images